Telecine STE-B1 · BTS Media Solutions GmbH Brunnenweg 9 D-64331 Weiterstadt, Germany P.O. Box 1165...

Operating Instructions

Telecine STE-B1

BTS Media Solutions GmbH

Brunnenweg 9D-64331 Weiterstadt, GermanyP.O. Box 1165

Tel: +49 (0) 6155-870-0Fax: +49 (0) 6155-870-300

Web SitesInternet: www.thomsonbroadcast.com

www.imagingsystems.de

Intranet: www.weiterstadt.thmulti.com

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot be reproduced, neithercommunicated to a third party, without written authorization from THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions.

Please notify THOMSON multimedia Broadcast Solutions of any errors in this document. We also would appreciate any commentsyou have to improve this manual.

� BTS Media Solutions GmbH 2002. All rights reserved.

Copyrights

Published by

All product names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Trademarks

www.thomsonbroadcast.com

www.imagingsystems.de

www.weiterstadt.thmulti.com

ContentsSTE-B1

IOperating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

CONTENTS

1. General

1.1 About the Manual 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Software State 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Control and Display Elements

2.1 Filmdeck 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Control Panels 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Local Control Panel FH 4500 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Graphical Control Panel GCP 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Operational Preparations

3.1 Hardware Conditions 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Power-Up 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 Basic Adjustments of the Telecine 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Configuration of the Control Panel 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Select TV Standard 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 User-Specific Configuration of the Telecine 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Change Optical Block 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Change Film Gate 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Using Effect Filters 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3.1 General 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3.2 Inserting the Effect Filter 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3.3 Focus Adjustment 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4 Setup Filmdeck 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.5 Setup Film 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.6 Select TV-Ratio 4:3 / 16:9 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.7 Select Speed 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 Perform FPN Correction 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.6 Thread the Film 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Define Winding Direction 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2.1 Mount Winding Plate 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2.2 Mount Film Reels 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.4 Thread Film Correctly 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.4.1 Winding Plate Operation 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.4.2 Film Reel Operation 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.4.3 Switch to Standby 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 Adjust Frame Line 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 Adjust Focus 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.9 Adjust Sizing Format 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1 Select Fixed Film Scanning Format 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.2 Select Fixed Reproduction Format 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.3 Adjust Sizing Format Variably 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.4 Adjust Horizontal and Vertical Blanking 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents STE-B1

II Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

3.10 Matching to Different Color and Monochrome Film Types 3-33. . . . . . . . . . 3.10.1 Define Film Type 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.2 Adjust Film Masking 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.3 Adjust Intensity of Film Illumination 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.4 Adjust Analog Signal Basic Gain 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.5 Adjust White Level (and Black Level) 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.6 Adjust Black Level 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.7 Adjust White Level 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.8 Adjust Gray Level (Gamma Maser and Gamma RGB) 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.9 Adjust Contour and Coring 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.11 Adjust Audio Channels (Option) 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.1 Select Audio Sources 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.2 Pre-Equalize Audio Sources 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.3 Adjust Dolby Noise Reduction 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.4 Select Lowpass Filter 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.5 Synchronize Digital Audio Channels 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.6 Select Preemphasis 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.7 Select Mono/Stereo Operation 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.8 Adjust Lip-synchronous Film Sound 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.9 Check Film Audio Paths With Test Tone 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.10 Adjust Studio Level 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.11 Adapt Audio Outputs to Studio Inputs 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.12 Adjust Headphone and Monitoring Volume 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.13 Adjust SEPMAG Channels 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12 Using ARRI, AATON or EVERTZ Keycode Readers 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.1 Safety Instructions 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.2 General 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.3 Tools Required 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.4 Overview Mounting Set 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12.5 Mounting the Keycode Readers on the Respective Mounting Plate 3-71. . . . . . 3.12.5.1 ARRI Keycode Reader 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.5.2 AATON Keycode Reader 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.5.3 EVERTZ Keycode Reader 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12.6 Mounting Single Keycode Reader Version on the Filmdeck Base Plate 3-75. . 3.12.6.1 ARRI Keycode Reader 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.6.2 AATON Keycode Reader 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.6.3 EVERTZ Keycode Reader 3-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.6.4 Deflection Roller Adjustment (AATON Reader) 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12.7 Parking Position of the Keycode Readers 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.7.1 ARRI Keycode Reader 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.7.2 AATON / EVERTZ Keycode Reader 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12.8 Mounting Dual Keycode Readers Version 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.8.1 ARRI and AATON Keycode Readers 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.8.2 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Readers 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12.9 Usage of the Parking Position in Case of Dual Reader Version 3-86. . . . . . . . . 3.12.9.1 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Readers 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.12.10 Arresting the Swing Arm of the Damping Roller 3-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.11 Cabling the Keycode Readers 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ContentsSTE-B1

IIIOperating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

3.12.12 EMV Requirements 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Menu control

4.1 Basic Menu Control with Graphical Control Panel GCP 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Control and Display Elements GCP 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Menustructure of GCP 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Basic Menu Control with Functional Control Panel FCP 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Main Menu Overview FCP 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Home Menu FCP 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Adjust Channel CH 1, CH 2 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Set Focus 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 Set Frame 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 Select Speed 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 Film Menu FCP 4-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Set Film Masking 4-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Film Setup 4-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5 Sizing Menu FCP 4-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Repro Data 4-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Adjust Blank 4-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Sizing Setup 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.1 Sizing Setup “Zoom Mode” 4-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.2 Sizing Setup “Auto Unity” 4-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.3 Sizing Setup “ACA-Emul” 4-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.4 Sizing Setup “Cinemascope” 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.5 Sizing Setup “H-flip” 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.6 Sizing Setup “V-flip” 4-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.7 Sizing Setup “Fixed Aspect” 4-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.8 Sizing Setup “Fixed Repro” 4-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.9 Sizing Setup ”SDTV-Ratio” 4-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.10 Sizing Setup ”16mm Mode” 4-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.11 Sizing Setup “Rhombic Effects” 4-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3.12 Sizing Setup ”Sizing Base” 4-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 Fixed Film Formats (Tables) 4-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.1 35 mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate 4-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.2 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate 4-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.3 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate, Anamorphic 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.4 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate, Anamorphic 4-41. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.5 35mm, 3 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.6 35mm, 3 Perf, full aperture LGA, ACA gate 4-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.7 35mm, 2 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.8 35mm, 2 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate 4-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.9 16mm, Super 16mm LGA and Gate 4-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.10 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate 4-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.11 16mm, Super LGA and Gate, Anamorphic 4-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4.12 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate, Anamorphic 4-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 Grading Menu FCP 4-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1 Grading Setup 4-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.1 Grading Setup Menu ”CRT Gamma” (Cathode Ray Tube) 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.2 Grading Setup Menu ”Color”F 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.3 Grading Setup Menu ”Contour Gain Bal.” 4-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.4 Grading Setup Menu ”Peak Frequency H or V” 4-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.5 Grading Setup Menu “Ranges” 4-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents STE-B1

IV Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

4.6.1.6 Grading Setup Menu “Black Gamma Mode” 4-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.7 Grading Setup Menu “White Gamma Mode” 4-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.8 Grading Setup Menu “6 SC Limiter” 4-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.9 Grading Setup Menu “6 SC Illegal Color” (Mark) 4-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.10 Extended Color Correction Ranges 4-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.11 Grading Recommendation in “Extended Range” Mode 4-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.12 Adjustment of the Unity Values in the “Extended Range” Mode 4-58. . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.13 High Density Range in Print NEG Mode 4-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.14 Black Stretch / Compression 4-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.15 White Stretch / Compression 4-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.1.16 Black and White Gamma Combined 4-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 Time Code Menu FCP 4-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 Keycode Setup 4-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 Checking and Operating Keycode Generation 4-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2.1 Manual Setup 4-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2.2 Remarks Concerning the Keycode Numbering 4-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2.3 Learn Mode “Head Offset” 4-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2.4 Remarks Concerning “Keycode in Data” 4-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP 4-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9 Audio Level Menu FCP 4-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.1 Audio Level Setup 4-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9.2 Operating Sequences 4-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10 Audio Config Menu FCP 4-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.1 Setup Input Source 4-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 Setup Noise Reduction 4-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.3 Setup Lowpass 4-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.4 Select Reference 4-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.5 Setup Preemphasis 4-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.6 Select Output Mode 4-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.7 Setup Channel Delay 4-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.8 Select Test Tone 4-107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.11 Monitoring Menu FCP 4-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.1 Select Test Pattern 4-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.2 Preset WFM 4-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3 Monitoring Setup 4-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3.1 Monitoring Setup ”Sequence” 4-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3.2 Monitoring Setup ”H-Blanking” 4-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3.3 Monitoring Setup ”Clamp Local” 4-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3.4 Monitoring Setup ”Clamp Remote” 4-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3.5 Monitoring Setup ”RemCtrl 1–2” 4-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3.6 Monitoring Setup ”Master on” 4-119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12 User Menu FCP 4-121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1 Setup Data Output 4-124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1.1 Data Output Setup ”Packing Mode” 4-125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1.2 Data Output Setup ”Data Conversion” 4-126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1.3 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for TV 4-140. . . . . . . . . 4.12.1.4 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for Film 4-143. . . . . . . . 4.12.1.5 Data Output Setup ”Connection Mode” 4-143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1.6 Data Output Setup ”Image File Format” 4-144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1.7 Data Output Setup ”Color Sequence” 4-145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1.8 Data Output Setup ”Transfer Mode” 4-146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ContentsSTE-B1

VOperating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

4.13 Setup Menu FCP 4-147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.1 Setup TV Standard 4-149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2 Setup Film Deck 4-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.1 Filmdeck Setting “Core Diameter Left / Right” 4-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.2 Filmdeck Setting “Auto Stop” 4-153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.3 Filmdeck Setting “Perforation” 4-154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.4 Filmdeck Setting ”Auto Rescan” 4-155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.5 Filmdeck Setting ”Scan Standard Mode” 4-156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.6 Filmdeck Setting ”Maximum Shuttle Speed 35mm” 4-157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.7 Filmdeck Setting ”Maximum Shuttle Speed 16mm” 4-157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.8 Filmdeck Setting ”SepMag Coupling” 4-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.9 Filmdeck Setting ”TCgen Out Coupling” 4-158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.10 Filmdeck Setting ”Editor Out Coupling” 4-159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.2.11 Filmdeck Setting ”Lamp Shutdown Delay” 4-159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.3 Setup Video 4-161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.1 Setup Video ”H/V-Blanking” 4-161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.2 Setup Video ”Analog Coding Format” 4-162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.3 Setup Video ”Sync on RGB” 4-163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.4 Setup Video ”Limiter 102%” 4-163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.5 Setup Video ”VITC” 4-163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.6 Setup Video ”Key Blanking” 4-164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.7 Setup Video ”Digital Coding Format” 4-164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.8 Setup Video ”Sync on YCRCB” 4-165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.9 Setup Video ”Bi-Level Sync” 4-165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.10 Setup Video ”Actual HOA Filter” 4-166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.11 Setup Video ”Output Wordlength” 4-166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.3.12 Setup Video ”Matrix 1080x720p” 4-166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.4 Setup Genlock 4-167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.4.1 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Ref-Sync-Select” 4-168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.4.2 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Pixel_Delay” 4-168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.4.3 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Subpixel_Delay” 4-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.4.4 Genlock Setting ”Genlock Line_Delay” 4-169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.4.5 Genlock Setting ”Enable Rack2-Rack3 Delay” 4-170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.4.6 Genlock Setting ”Rack2-Rack3 Delay” 4-170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.5 Setup Panel 4-172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.1 Control Panel Setting ”Film Supply” 4-172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.2 Control Panel Setting ”Screen Saver” 4-173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.3 Control Panel Setting ”Beep on User Message” 4-173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.4 Control Panel Setting ”Beep on Diagn Message” 4-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.5 Control Panel Setting ”Keyclick” 4-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.6 Control Panel Setting ”Multi Function Dial Memory” 4-174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.7 Control Panel Setting ”Press MF Dial Enabled” 4-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.8 Control Panel Setting ”Pressing MF Dial Switches JOG <–>” 4-175. . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.9 Control Panel Setting ”MF Dial Clutch” 4-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.10 Control Panel Setting ”MF Dial Rubbing” 4-176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.11 Control Panel Setting ”Volatile Softkeys Provided after (x0.1s)” 4-176. . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.12 Control Panel Setting ”Extended Softkey Modes (Toggle, Switch)” 4-177. . . . . . 4.13.5.13 Control Panel Setting ”Key Toggles if Pressed Shorter than (x 0.1s)” 4-178. . . . 4.13.5.14 Control Panel Setting ”Key Auto Hold Time in Switch Mode (sec)” 4-178. . . . . . 4.13.5.15 Control Panel Setting ”Key Holding if Pressed Longer than” 4-179. . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13.5.16 Control Panel Setting ”Rotation Adjust Mode (Linear / Accelerated)” 4-180. . . . . 4.13.5.17 Control Panel Setting ”iMCS Message Weighting for Panel” 4-180. . . . . . . . . . . .

4.13.6 Set Time 4-181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents STE-B1

VI Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

4.13.7 Set REMIF – Setup Remote Interface 4-182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP 4-185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.1 Keyboard Test 4-187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.2 Display Test 4-188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.3 Status Display 4-189. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.4 Option Control Dialog 4-191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.5 Software Configuration of the Controllers 4-193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.6 Hard- and Software Equipment of the P.C. Boards 4-194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Operation

5.1 Reproduction (Play) 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 Play 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Jogging 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Vario Motion 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.4 Shuttle 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Automatic Switching-Off 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Film End Switching-Off 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Film Break Switching-Off 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Thermal Switching-Off 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Manual Emergency Switching-Off 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Maintenance

6.1 Basic Accessories 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 Maintenance and Aids Materials 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 Cleaning and Maintenance Intervals 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Safety Instructions 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 Clean the Film Drive Mechanism 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 Clean the PT Rollers 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 Clean the Film Gate 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.3 Clean the Capstan Roller 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4 Clean and Degauss the Commag Audio ead 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.5 Clean the Reel Holder, Winding Plate and Reel Locking Knob 6-11. . . . . . . . . .

6.6 Clean the Optical Path 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 Clean the Optical Block 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Clean the Front Area of the Light Splitter 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 Clean the Condenser Light Slit 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.4 Clean the Filters and Lenses 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.5 Clean the Filters of the Filter Wheel 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7 Clean the Comopt Sound Optics 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 Change the Comopt Sound Lamp 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.9 Clean the Air Filters 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.1 Front Side Filters 6-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.2 Rear Side Filters 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ContentsSTE-B1

VIIOperating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

6.10 Adjust Compressed Air of the Gateblast Unit 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.11 Clean the Blowers 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.1 Exhaust Air Blowers 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.2 Fresh Air Blowers 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12 Change the Backup Battery 6.12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.1 Change the Backup Battery in the Telecine 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.2 Change the Backup Battery in the Functional Control Panel 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Index

Contents STE-B1

VIII Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

1. GeneralSTE-B1

1-1Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

1. GENERAL

1.1 ABOUT THE MANUAL

This manual is part 2 of the Shadow Telecine STE-B1 Customer’s Manual.

This part informs the user about control and display elements, operational prepara-tions, menu control, operation and maintenance.

All further information concerning installation and repair you will find in the Planningand Installation Manual and the Service Manual (in preparation) of the system.

Note!The menu control is described in the separate manual

Graphical Control Panel GCP1 Customer’s Manual - FU 0104

1.2 SOFTWARE STATE

1.2.1 STE-B1 SHADOW TELECINE

The present manual documents the following software states:

Shadow Telecine operating software version V2.47

� ASC: Analog Signal Controller Board FY 4105 (in rack 1) V2.44. . . . .

� FDC: Filmdeck Controller Board FY 4203 (in rack 2) V2.47. . . . . . . . .

� SPC: Spatial Processing Control Board FY 6346 (in rack 3) V4.44. . .

� FCP: Functional Control Panel V4.41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� GCP: Graphical Control Panel V1.7.10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.2 TELECINE CONTROLLERS

� Pandora PlatinumThe operating software V2.47 (Shadow) was tested by Thomson with Platinumsoftware version 3.8.2

� Da Vinci “Renaissance 8:8:8The operating software V2.47 (Shadow) was tested by Thomson with Renais-sance software version 4.3.2

� Da Vinci “Mainframe 2k”The operating software version V2.47 (Shadow) was tested by Thomson withMainframe 2K software version 3.1.2

1. General STE-B1

1-2 Operating Instructions – Rev. 2 / 04.2002

2. Control and Display ElementsSTE-B1


2. CONTROL AND DISPLAY ELEMENTS

2.1 FILMDECK

5

1

2

3

4

3

STE -B1

Fig. 201: Shadow Telecine STE-B1

2. Control and Display Elements STE-B1


1 Lamps (2x) serve the lighting of the telecine interior. Can be switched off,if required.

Film deck lamp switch

2 Locking leverlever for the optical block (LGA, lens gate assembly). The optical block is locked by turning the locking lever in cw direction.

Locking lever



3 Wind A / Btwo switches for selecting the winding direction of the threaded film.

WIND A Winding direction in ccw direction.

WIND B Winding direction in cw direction.

Application: for rewinding a film threaded with inversed sides.

Winding switch

4 Control PanelLocal Control Panel FH 4500 for Play, Stop, Step, Shuttle, FPN,Framing, Stand by, additional functions and remote delegation.For further details see next section.

5 Power mains switch for switching on/off the telecine.



2.2 CONTROL PANELS

2.2.1 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL FH 4500

F1 F2

S8 S16

Play

StopStep

Focus

Standby

Step

Play

��

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

�

�

�

�

� � �

7651 2 3 4

8



Function buttons are not assigned yet.Quick selection for future use.

Pre selection of S8mm film scanning for FPN correctionOnly active in case S8mm Option is installed!

Pre selection of 16mm film scanning for FPN correction

Pushbutton for coarse framing adjustment by means of the film frameline.

Setting range:Each time the key is pressed, the film will be shifted in downward or upward direc-tion by one perforation whole per picture of the picture height.

Switches on the automatical noise signal compensation: Fixed Pattern Noise andshading correction (shading signal compensation and white balance).

During compensation, the picture gate has to be open (no film threaded)!

In order to avoid operational errors, this function is only enabled when pressing thetwo buttons at the same time!

Pushbuttons for the film motion control:

Single-frame selection forward/reverse. On pressing the Step button, the telecine will automatically enter the Stop mode.Still frame has broadcast quality.

After Stop the projection lamp is switched to reduced lighting power immediately(approx. 5 s after Stop the safety shutter is closed).

Film presentation in the forward or reverse mode. Can be entered from all operatingmodes. The projection lamp is switched to full lighting power.

In the Play mode: quick stop.In the Shuttle mode: termination of the search function.

Visible search mode is switched on (selected: shuttle speed = 0 and audio channelis muted). Shuttle mode can be entered from all operational modes.

The search speed is set with control 5 and remains constant.

Rotation to the left = film motion reverseRotation to the right = film motion forward

F1 ... F41

S8

S16

FRM ↑↓ / FPN2

FPN

Film motioncontrol

3

Step

Play

Stop

Shuttle4



Function together with key Shuttle:for rapidly locating a scene in forward and reverse run.

Function together with key Focus adjust/assist:for optical film focusing.

Pushbuttons for the focus control:

The adjustment is set with control 5 .

Pressing the button delegates the control functions from the Local Control Panelto an external Remote Control Panel and vice versa (toggle mode).The button is lit when the control functions are remotable.

Automatic switch over from Remote to Local Control Panel:

1. with Stand by “On” and pressing button Stand by (e.g. in an emergency)

2. pressing button Stop.

Indicates that the machine is ready for operation.Pushbutton for switching on the standby mode.The winding motors are switched on (film is automatically tightened) and the cap-stan motor is released for operation.

Prior to settings, always carry out FPN correction first.

During operation, the Stand by button lamp has to be lit all the time.

Control5

Focus6

Remote7

Stand by8



2.2.2 GRAPHICAL CONTROL PANEL GCP 1

Prev

Ctrl

Dialog function buttons

Dialog buttons

Digipots

For future usePower to panel to machine

TK

Previous

Control

Lock

Acceleration

Help

Digits

Unity

Trackball delegation:

TK button

Trackball

Machine controls2. Display

Fig. 202: Graphical Control Panel GCP1

Machine Control Section

The Machine Control Section is located in the lower right corner of the GCP.All buttons (including the trackball – if delegated) perform transport functions of thetelecine. Undeclared buttons are currently not in use.



TK

JOG

Play Play

Step Step

Stop

VAR STL

6

5

4

3

2

1

Fig. 203: Machine control section

1 1 button for the machine selection (TK)

2 Display button for trackball delegation to GUI

3 Machine button for trackball delegation to machine control

4 Trackball

5 3 buttons for Machine-Mode-Selection (Jog, Var, Shuttle)

6 5 machine-control-buttons (play, reverse play, step forward/backward, stop)

Undeclared buttons are not in use!



To control the telecine press the TK BUTTON (Button gets lit). All transport controlsare now delegated to the telecine.

Over the trackball on the left you find the DISPLAY BUTTON. Pressing this buttondelegates the trackball to the GUI (graphical user interface).

Over the trackball on the right you find the MACHINE DECK BUTTON. Pressingthis button delegates the trackball to the machine (TK) for shuttle, jog or variablespeed control.

The trackball can be used for various functions.Delegation of the trackball is done as follows:Pressing the DISPLAY BUTTON delegates the trackball to the next control in thecurrent dialog which can receive trackball input (only possible if there is any con-trol). Moving the trackball has the same effect as sliding the corresponding controlon the touch–screen.Pressing the MACHINE DECK BUTTON delegates the trackball to the selectedmachine (TK).In this mode the trackball can be used as a SHUTTLE/JOG/VARI speed control.

3 buttons for the transport mode selection (JOG, VAR and SHUTTLE) are belowthe trackball.With MACHINE DECK enabled the trackball controls the telecine in the selectedmode.

The hard keys for film deck control of the telecine are located below the SHUTTLE/JOG/VARI speed buttons (Step forward, Step backward, Play, Play reverse andStop).

Note: All other dialog function buttons are explained in the separateGraphical Control Panel Manual FU 0 126 630 400.

TK Button1

Display Button2

Machine DeckButton

3

Trackball4

Jog, Var, ShuttleButtons

5

Step Forward,Step Backward,Play Reverse, Play Forward

6

3. Operational PreparationsSTE-B1


3. OPERATIONAL PREPARATIONS

The sections of the chapter ”Operational Preparations” have a defined order.Preceding sections are mostly precondition for the succeeding sections (such as”Perform FPN correction” before ”Thread the film” etc.) and should therefore beconsidered when setting into operation.

3.1 HARDWARE CONDITIONS

The Graphical Control Panel has to be connected to the Shadow Telecine.

The video and audio output signals are available at the respective output sockets.Depending on the intended further application, use the corresponding output sock-ets.

Note: A detailed overview on the available inputs and outputs and their applications is given in the manual ”Planning and Installation”.

Depending on further use, the video reference inputs and outputs have to be con-nected with the remaining application units.

Depending on the application, the time code signal has to be passed on to the otherunits.

The mounting support combined with a keycode reader head serves to generatethe film keycode and to insert it to the DPX data output.

If required, connect a video monitor for checking, and monitor both audio channelsvia the audio monitor outputs.

The option Data Output - as part of the Transfer Engine option - is required to pro-vide high speed film data - DPX or TIFF format - for recording on computer worksta-tions or Specter Virtual DataCine VDC2000.

A HiPPI serial interface - also part of the option Phantom Transfer Engine - providesthe high speed data transmission to a workstation / Specter via fibre optic cables.

3.2 POWER-UP

See corresponding chapter “Power-On” in the Manual ”Planning and Installation”.

GCP Installation

Video and audio

Video reference

Time code

Keycode ReaderMounting Support

Monitoring

Data Output

HIPPI SerialInterface

3. Operational Preparations STE-B1


3.3 BASIC ADJUSTMENTS OF THE TELECINE

3.3.1 CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROL PANEL AND DELEGATION OF OPERATIONAL CONTROL

Configuration of the graphical control panel is mostly performed only once.For details, see Customer’s Manual GCP.

After “power on” the display of the graphical control panel shows the power-up test,and subsequently the HOME menu.

Fig. 301: Home Menu

Press once the CONTROL BUTTON to get control over the Shadow Telecine.

Note:Only available if the front doors of the Shadow are closed.

Ctrl



3.3.2 SELECT TV STANDARD

If the momentary TV standard does not correspond to the desired standard,change the TV standard as follows.

Select the main menu ”TK Config”, SDTV or HDTV submenu.

Fig. 302: TK config menu, submenu SDTV

Window SDTV / HDTV serves to choose the TV standard.The change of the TV standard is acknowledged by a beep tone.

Only those outputs are active, which are selected by the TV standard.HDTV / DTV is only available, if option HDTV / DTV is mounted in Rack 3.



Note: When switching over the TV standard, the film drive has to be in thestop mode.

Subsequently, a restart of the telecine is made with corresponding message on thedisplay of the control panel GCP1.

TV standard

Fig. 303: Home menu with the new TV standard



3.4 USER-SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION OF THE TELECINE

3.4.1 CHANGE OPTICAL BLOCK

Fig. 304: Optical blocks of the Shadow telecine

Changing the Lens Gate Assembly (FG S16 LGA (16mm), FG FA35 LGA (35mm)optically matches the telecine to the wanted film format.



Handle of theoptical block

Guide rail

Locking lever ofthe optical block

Film gate

Fig. 305: Optical block of the Shadow Telecine

1. Remove the threaded film from the optical block, if necessary.

2. Unlock the optical block (LGA, lens gate assembly).For this purpose, turn the locking lever of the optical block in downwards ccwdirection.

3. Seize the optical block at the two handles, pull it out on its guide rails and re-move it.

Attention!

When pulling out the optical block, keep a firm hold on it (approx. 8 kg) !As soon as the optical block leaves the guide rails, it might be possible thatit slides downwards.

4. Set the new optical block on the guide rails and slide it slowly towards the filmdeck plate until it fits.

5. Lock the lever. For this purpose, turn the locking lever of the optical block in up-wards cw direction.

6. Perform FPN correction (see corresponding section).

Change



3.4.2 CHANGE FILM GATE

Super optical blocks need an additional film gate when operating standard films.

1. Open the film gate locking. For that reason hold the film gate locking lever atthe lower end and pull it up.

2. Remove the built-in film gate.

3. Insert and lock the new film gate.

4. Perform FPN correction (see section 3.5).

Film gate

Film gate locking lever

Fig. 306: Film gate of the Shadow Telecine

Note:

Film Gate self-adjustment after exchange:Open the locking lever and close it again without touching the Film Gate.

Change



3.4.3 USING EFFECT FILTERS

3.4.3.1 General

For generating optical effects, an effect filter set is available for the Shadow Tele-cine. The filter set (Order Number 3 119 101 003) is part of the standard accesso-ries and is supplied with the telecine.

For the various applications, 11 different supermist filters are provided, which canbe easily inserted into the light path between CCD Sensor and projection lamp:

� Clear supermist filters: 0.25, 0.5, 1.00, 2.00, 3.00 and optical flat (clear)

� Black supermist filters: 0.25, 0.5, 1.00, 2.00, 3.00

The type of the filter Clear Supermist or Black Supermist can be identified on alabel.

Clear

Clear Supermist 0.25

Clear Supermist 0.50

Clear Supermist 1

Clear Supermist 2

Clear Supermist 3

Black Supermist 0.25

Black Supermist 0.50

Black Supermist 1

Black Supermist 2

Black Supermist 3



3.4.3.2 Inserting the Effect Filter

Insert the Effect filter

Guide railfor Effect filters



3.4.3.3 Focus Adjustment

The usage of light effect filters can cause de-focussing of the system. It is recom-mended to adjust the focus when an effect filter is being installed or changed.

The focus slider controls the focus servo in the telecine.Focussing can be done either with the digipot control or by sliding on the touch-screen, for details see chapter “Adjust Focus”

Fig. 307: Home menu with Focus slider

Hitting the STORE button opens a dialog window. With O.K. your new setting willbe stored.

Important Notes!

Important note with regard to FPN Correction!

Please ensure, that no effect filter is inserted into the optical block during:

� Power up of Shadow Telecine STE (Grayscale disk alignment and FPN correc-tion is mandatory)

� Reset of Shadow Telecine from the Control Panel (Grayscale disk alignmentand FPN correction is mandatory)

� FPN correction

Normal FPN correction should always be done without the effect filter to ensureperfect correction. If FPN is performed with a filter inserted, FPN correction will onlybe correct for this special filter.

Setting

Storing



3.4.4 SETUP FILMDECK

Set filmdeck settings in th main menu “TK Config”

Fig. 308: Menu TK Config

SetCore diameterAuto StopMax Shuttle Speed 35mm Max Shuttle Speed 16mm in main menu ”SETUP”.

3.4.5 SETUP FILM

Open the main menu Film and adapt the telecine to the film to be played. Use thebutton “Filmtype”

Fig. 309: Film menu

Configuration possibilities and explanations are to be found in the GCP Manual.



3.4.6 SELECTING TV RATIO 4:3 / 16:9

Open then main menu TK Config, select submenu SDTV

Fig. 310: Main menu TK Config submenu SDTV

Press button “SDTV Ratio” and select 4:3 or 16:9.

3.4.7 SELECT SPEED

Open then main menu TK Config

Fig. 311: Menu TK Config

Select or adjust a fixed (or a variable) film speed for the telecine.Selection of the film speeds and explanations, see GCP manual.



3.5 PERFORM FPN CORRECTION

F1 F2

S8 S16

Play

StopStep

Focus

Standby

Step

Play

��

��

��

� ��

� ��

��

�

�

�

�

� � �

FPN correction:Press both FPN buttonstogether

Fig. 312: Local control panel of the Shadow Telecine

Performing a FPN (Fixed Pattern Noise) correction effects an automatic noise sig-nal compensation in the white as well as an automatic white balance adjustment.

FPN (Fixed Pattern Noise): – noise signal in the white signal



1. Perform FPN the first time after a “warm up” of about 15 minutes.

2. Perform FPN before threading the film!

Note! FPN correction with film: picture adjustment useless and thermal film damage possible!

3. Repeat FPN, if the environment temperature changes by more than �5°C.

4. Repeat FPN to compensate illumination level losses, if the environment tem-perature changes by more than �2°C.

Press both FPN buttons together (Stand by OFF).During the automatic FPN correction (duration approx. 1 minutes) both FPN keysare lit.

If both FPN buttons blink, a FPN correction has to be performed.

The buttons should blink:

1. After switching on the Shadow Telecine

2. After changing the optical block

3. After changing the film gate

If only the lower FPN button blinks after switching on the device the grayscale diskalignment GDA process during the boot sequence was not successful. Remove thetrouble and press both FPN buttons together to perform a new grayscale disk align-ment including a FPN correction.

Note!

Performing FPN correction for S8mm film scanning, see optional manual“S8mm Scanning”.

S8mmFilm Scanning

FPN conditions

Performing theFPN correction



3.6 THREAD THE FILM

Thread the film according to the film threading path printed on the film deck.Before the film can be threaded, the following preparations have to be made.

3.6.1 DEFINE WINDING DIRECTION

The both switches A/B on the film deck are to be set in position A (= PLAY position)for normal film operation. During operation both film reels wind anti-clockwise.

Position B is used only for rewinding a film wound side-inverted.

WINDB

WINDB AA

Normaloperation:both switches in position A

B A

WIND

STE -B1

Fig. 313: Film threading path



3.6.2 REEL HOLDER SYSTEM WITH SEPARATE WINDING PLATES

3.6.2.1 Mount Winding Plates

If the film to be played is a film roll with a bobbin, winding plates have to be mountedon both reel spindles.

Remove the complete locking device from the reel spindle.In addition, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Slide the winding plate onto the reel spindle.

Plug in the film bobbin onto the carrier of the winding plate.

Slide the locking device onto the reel spindle until it locks in with an audible click.

Attention!

When operating with winding plates, the inner shaft of the locking device hasto protrude, otherwise press the locking button and the shaft will jump out.

Reel spindle

Bobbin Inner shaft

Release button

Release ring

Locking button

Lockingdevice

Winding plate

Fig. 314: Mounting of the winding plates

Mounting



3.6.2.2 Mount Film Reels

If the film to be played is a film reel, the full film reel has to be mounted on the left-sided reel spindle and the empty film reel on the right-sided one.

Remove the complete locking device from the respective reel spindle.For this purpose, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Slide the film reel on the reel spindle.

Plug in the film reel onto the carrier of the reel spindle.

Slide the locking device on the reel spindle until it locks in with an audible click.

Attention:

When operating with film reels, the inner shaft of the locking device has tobe sunk, otherwise press the locking button and slide the inner shaft back-wards.

Reel spindle Reel Inner shaft Release ring

Release button

Locking button

Lockingdevice

Fig. 315: Mounting the film reels

Mounting



3.6.3 FIXED WINDING PLATES SYSTEM

3.6.3.1 Using fixed Winding Plates

Two fixed winding plates can be mounted on the Telecine. To adapt any filmtypes tothe winding plates use the inlays for bobbins or the inlays for reels as well as the twolocking devices. The inlays for 16/35mm films are delivered with the Telecine or canbe ordered separately (9mm spindle = FH 6609 / 8mm spindle FH 6608). The inlaysfor S8mm films are optional.

3.6.3.2 Scanning S8mm Films

Mandatory for scanning Super 8mm films are the special fixed winding plates, de-scribed in the next chapterand the Option “S8mm Film Scanning”.

Details see Mounting & Operating Instructions:

FU 0105 Super 8 mm Scanning

Caution!

Use the fixed wind-ing plates for S8mmfilm scanning!

Fig. 316: Fixed winding plates with S8mm inlays



3.6.3.3 Mount Film Rolls

1. Remove the complete locking device from the reel spindle.In addition, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Winding plates

Inlays for film bobbins

Fig. 317: Fixed winding-sheets with bobbin inlays

2. If the film is on a bobbin, the inlays for bobbins have to be mounted on both fixedwinding plates.

Bobbin

Release button

Fixed winding plate

Inlay for bobbin

Locking Device& Button

Reel spindle

Fig. 318: Mounting film rolls with bobbin

3. Plug in the film bobbin onto the carrier of the inlay.

4. Slide the locking device onto the reel spindle until it locks in with an audibleclick.

Attention!

When operating with bobbins, the inner shaft of the locking device has toprotrude, otherwise press the locking button and the shaft will jump out.

Mountingfilm rolls



3.6.3.4 Mount Film Reels

If the film to be played is a film reel, the full film reel has to be mounted on the left-sided reel spindle and the empty film reel on the right-sided one.

Winding plates

Inlays for film reels

Fig. 319: Fixed winding plates with inlays for film reel

1. Remove the complete locking device from the respective reel spindle.For this purpose, pull the release ring towards the release button.

Reel spindle

Film reel

Release button

Release ringLocking button

Lockingdevice

Fixed winding plate

Inlay for film reel16 & 35 mm

Inlay for film reel S8 mm optional

Fig. 320: Mounting the film reels

2. Mount the reel inlay to the fixed winding plate (on each side)

3. Slide the film reel on the reel spindle.



4. Plug in the film reel onto the carrier of the reel spindle.

5. Slide the locking device on the reel spindle until it locks in with an audible click.

Attention:

When operating with film reels, the inner shaft of the locking device has tobe sunk, otherwise press the locking button and slide the inner shaft back-wards.



3.6.4 THREAD FILM CORRECTLY

Film Thread direction

S8 mm film (option S8 scanning req.) Put perforation to the film deck plate

16mm film Put perforation to the film deck plate

35mm film Put audio track to the film deck plate

3.6.4.1 Winding plate operation

Slide the full film roll, as shown below, onto the left winding plate and lead the filmon film path ”A” (printed on the film deck plate) to the right winding plate.Insert the film leader into the slot of the winding body and give the winding plate afew turns counterclockwise.

3.6.4.2 Film reel operation

Slide the full film reel onto the left reel spindle and lead the film on film path ”A” tothe right (empty) film reel.Insert the film leader into the slot of the film reel and give the reel a few turns coun-terclockwise.

WINDB

WINDB AA

Fig. 321: Film threading path without PT Rollers



WINDB

WINDB AA

Fig. 322: Film threading path with PT Rollers

Note:

When threading the film into the film guiding edges of the optical block makesure that the film properly fits to the edges and that there are no emulsiondeposits at the film guiding edges (for cleaning see section “Maintenance”).

Attention:

If the film reel is wound up very loosely, the film can be damaged during op-eration.

The film has to be wound up tighter.

If there is no other possibility, the film can be wound once more on the tele-cine by means of the following steps.

1. Thread the film as usual.

2. Wind the film with 3 times the normal shuttle speed (start slowly)

Note: An automatic limitation to this speed can be achieved by openingthe front doors.

3. Rewind the film.

3.6.4.3 Switch to standby

Subsequently press key STAND BY on the Local Control Panel of the Shadow Tele-cine (film is tightened).



3.7 ADJUST FRAME LINE

To achieve a correct vertical picture position for 35mm films press “Framing” keyon the Local Control Panel several times. This effects a coarse correction of theframe bar downward (1 perforation hole downward per film picture).Shift frame line until it disappears under the upper or lower picture border.

or via Graphical Control Panel GCP:

Select the Home menu.

Fig. 323: Home menu with ”Framing Adjust”

Shift frame bar of 35mm film by pressing the framing coarse buttons (arrows up anddown) several times until the frame bar disappears under the upper or lower pictureborder.

The framing fine sliders allow neat vertical positioning for all film formats.

Pressing the STORE button enables the current setting to be stored and recalled ifyou hit Unity.

Note:

For operation, first correct the frame bar and then make film/time code as-signment, because shifting the frame bar by 1 frame will also shift the frame/time code assignment.When placing the film on the sprocket wheel, take care to lace the frame baron the cross line of the sprocket wheel. Thus, the frame bar will not be visiblewhen playing the film.

Lace-up frame bar on the cross line

Fig. 324: Film position on the sprocket wheel

Shift the fame bar

Store frame barposition



3.8 ADJUST FOCUS

Graphical Control Panel GCP1

The focus slider controls the focus servo in the telecine.

Focussing can be done either with the digipot control or by sliding on the touch-screen.

Hitting the AID button sets zoom and contour to maximum and slows down the filmspeed to 6 fps.

Thus, film grain will appear as large and clear as possible which helps to find theoptimum focus position.

Fig. 325: Home menu with focus adjust slider

Hitting the STORE button and subsequently the O.K. button saves the focus valueas the new default.

Setting

Storing



3.9 ADJUST SIZING FORMAT

The sizing format (scanning and reproduction format) of the Telecine is set in thesizing menu.

1. The TV standard is selected (i.e., line standard is determined, see section 3.3.2Select TV Standard).

2. According to film format (16mm, S16mm, 35mm, S35mm), the suitable opticalblock is used (see section 3.4.1 Change Optical Block).

3. The film is threaded correctly (see section 3.6 Thread the Film).

4. The frame line is adjusted (see section 3.7 Adjust Frame Line).

3.9.1 SELECT FIXED FILM SCANNING FORMAT (FIXED ASPECT)

On the film box of the film to be played, the film scanning format (e.g. 1:1.85 /1:2.20 / 1:2.35) is noted in addition to the film format (16mm, 35mm etc.). If this format corresponds to a fixed format (1.85 / 2.20 / 2.35), the following stepsare necessary.

Selection Where? Function

1. Press key sizing Control panel

The sizing menu appears.

1080 60 I24500 x 1900012250 / 930721110 x 1900018750 / 930621102 x 1900018750 / 9500

Fig. 326: Sizing menu

Preconditions




2. Select submenu “Repro” Touchscreen

Select a fixed scan format by pressing “Fixed Aspect”

andaccording to the specification of the film

scanning format on the film box.

1207 x 1079

959 x 549

21.2519.0018.75

Fig. 327: Sizing menu, submenu Repro



3.9.2 SELECT FIXED REPRODUCTION FORMAT (FIXED REPRO)

When selecting a fixed film scanning format, a suitable reproduction format isselected each time automatically for this film.If an other reproduction format should be wanted nevertheless, proceed as follows.


3. Press button Sizing Controlpanel

The Sizing menu appears.

4. Select the submenu “Repro” Touchscreen

Select button ”fixed repro”

The reproduction formatsappears on the screen.

1207 x 1079

959 x 549

21.2519.0018.75

Fig. 328: Submenu Repro

5.Make a new selection

by pressing one of the repro for-mats

pull down

menu

Select further adjustmentsin the ”Sizing menu”

if necessary



3.9.3 ADJUST SIZING FORMAT VARIABLY

If the fixed reproduction format (as selected in section 3.9.2) does not yet corre-spond to the requests, the reproduction format can also be adjusted variably.




7. Select Size WindowTouch

screenSets sizing adjustments

to default values.

1080 60 I24500 x 1900012250 / 930721110 x 1900018750 / 930621102 x 1900018750 / 9500


8.

Click on the area to activate thedigipot control.

When active, the sliders arehighlighted

Window

Adjust with the digipot or slide on the touchscreenthe vertical and horizontal

reproduction format

Pay attention to the picture geometry,i.e. a circle has to be reproduced as a circle.



3.9.4 ADJUST HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL BLANKING




10. Select submenu Blanking Sizingmenu

Submenu ”Blanking”appears.

1201 x 1151959 x 575

Fig. 330: Submenu Blanking

11. Select the Film button SubmenuBlanking

The Film blanking adjustments (Size andPosition) determine the section of the picture

which is written into the frame store.Film blanking becomes part of the picture

(with only black content)

Adjust with the digipot or sliders the vertical blanking,

and the horizontal blanking.




The TV blanking adjustments (Size andPosition) determine the section of the picture

which is read out of the frame store. TV blanking is not part of the picture. It be-haves like an external blanking rendered by

a production switcher.

12. Select the TV button SubmenuBlanking

Adjust with the digipot or sliders the vertical blanking,

and the horizontal blanking.

The blanking settings should limit film picturecontent only slightly.

Vertical frame line corrections have to bemade before as described in section 3.7



3.10 MATCHING TO DIFFERENT COLOR AND MONOCHROME FILM TYPES

Precondition for this section are the preceding sections of chapter 3.The most important ones are:

1. Shadow Telecine user-specifically configurated

2. FPN correction performed

3. Film threaded

4. Frame line optimized

5. Picture optically focused

6. Sizing format adjusted

3.10.1 DEFINE FILM TYPE

Select Where? Adjust function

1. Press button Film Controlpanel

The Film menu appears

Fig. 331: Film menu




2. Double click function button ”unity ALL”

left to thetouch–screen

Adjusts standard values forthe complete film menu.

3. Select button Film Type Film menu

Make your choice from the drop-down menu.

For each filter type, positive and negativesetting are available. This function also

switches the gamma according to the se-lected film type.

Fig. 332: Film menu with drop down menu ”Film Type”

4.Depending on film to be played,

select one of the film types Pop-downmenu

Defines the following film types:

Print Positive

Print Negative

Intermediate Pos.

Intermediate Neg.

Primetime Pos.

Primetime Neg.

Color Positive

Color Negative



3.10.2 ADJUST FILM MASKING


5.For matching to special films,

select submenu“Masking”,

Film Menu Opens submenu ”Film masking”

comm_1

comm_2

comm_3

comm_4

comm_6

comm_7

comm_8

spec_1

TCP5285

TCPLIMX

comm_1

1.000 0.000

1.0000.000

comm_50.000 0.0001.

0.

0.

Fig. 333: Submenu ”Film masking with pull–down menu matrix

6.

Click button Matrix.Select fixed, preadjusted

matrix coefficientsfrom the drop-down menu.

Judge the color reproductionin the output pictureand via WFM output

testpoint 4 Mask/CRT Gamma

For test purposes usetestpoint 4 Mask / CRT Gamma

Menu Monitoring

Fig. 334: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Points




7.

If the correct color reproductionin the output pictures not yetachieved, click on new matrix inthe drop–down menu

An additional window “Enter new Matrix”opens and a two lined keypad is activated inthe top of the menu.

Fig. 335: Set new matrix name

8. Type in the name for the newmatrix coefficient

SubmenuMasking

Confirm by pressing the OK button.Now the coefficients in the matrix window

can be modified.




9.Clicking on the coefficients

opens numeric keypad on the topof the menu.

SubmenuMasking

Type in your modified values and confirm bypressing OK.

Fig. 336: Set coefficients



3.10.3 ADJUST INTENSITY OF FILM ILLUMINATION


10. Press menu button Film Controlpanel


Slide CCD Output

for 100 % video level

85%

Flash button

100 %

100 %

100 %

Fig. 337: Film menu

For test purposes usetestpoint 1 ASP / A/DMenu Monitoring

Fig. 338: Menu Monitoring, submenu Test Point

11.Shift slider “Light”

or use the trackballFilm Menu

The amount of light falling via the film on theCCDs can be controlled.




12.Run film

for adjustingthe intensity of film illumination

Search for a scene with low film density (brightlights, clouds or similar) and adjust the inten-sity of film illumination in such a way that thebrightest one of the RGB video signalsreaches a level of 100 % (oscilloscope).

”CCD Output Level Display:During adjustment watch the CCD OutputLevel Display!Make sure that this level is around 85%.

Or during Play:Pressing the “Flash button” sets film illumina-tion intensity at once to maximum CCD out-put level.

If 100 % video level is not reached, switchvideo basic gain to + 6 dB (see section 3.10.4)and adjust the film illumination intensity again.

13. Re-wind film



3.10.4 ADJUST ANALOG SIGNAL BASIC GAIN


14. Press button Gain Film Menu Opens pull down menu and shows the pos-sible selections for analog basic gain.

100 %

100 %

100 %

Fig. 339: Film menu with pull down menu Gain

15. Run filmfor judging the film density

With very dense film material,use basic gain ”6 dB”.

16. Select 6dB Pulldownmenu

Selection ”6 dB”doubles now the analog gain.



For test purposes usetestpoint 1 ASP / A/DMenu Monitoring




3.10.5 ADJUST WHITE LEVEL (AND BLACK LEVEL)


17. Press menu button Film Controlpanel


100 %

100 %

100 %

Fig. 341: Film menu

For test purposes usetestpoint 3 Gain / LiftMenu Monitoring


18.Run telecine

for adjusting the white level(and then the black level)

Search for a scene with picture white(or picture black) and stop.




19.

Matching Gainfor the white level adjustment

&

Matching Liftfor the black level adjustment

Film menu

Adjust picture whitein the R, G and B channels

with the corresponding digipot controls or bysliding on the touch screen matching Gain

in all channels to 100 % video signal.

Adjust picture blackin the R, G and B channels

in matching lift RGBto 1 % setup)

This is the basic adjustment for the film tobe played.

20. Re-wind filmColor corrections during later operation(scene for scene) are made via the Colormenu.



3.10.6 ADJUST BLACK LEVEL


21. Press menu button “Color” ControlPanel

The Color menu with submenu Primary color correction appears

Fig. 343: Color menu

For test purposes usetestpoint 4 Mask / CRT Gamma

Menu Monitoring


22. Run film for adjustingthe black levels

Search for a film scene with ablack object

and stop.

Note: Adjustments of Black Master and Black RGB do not change White level.




23.

Black Master controls the dark parts of the pic-

ture.

Slide Black on the touchscreen

Colormenu

Adjust the relevant channelsto 1 % black signal level

24.

Black RGBmagnitude and phase for

R, G or B black level adjustment.

Slide directly on the colored hexa-gon of the touchscreen or use thetrackball.By clicking on the area around thehexagon, the control is delegatedto the trackball.The cursor inside the hexagon in-dicates the working position.

Colormenu

Adjust the relevant channelsto 1 % black signal level

The adjustments are judged on the colormonitor and changed until an optimumblack level reproduction is achieved.

25. Re-wind film



3.10.7 ADJUST WHITE LEVEL


26. Color menu ControlPanel


27. Run film for adjustingthe white levels

Search for a film scene with awhite object

and stop.

28. White (Master)slide White on the touch screen

Touchscreen

Adjust the relevant channelsto 100 % white level

White (RGB)magnitude and phase for

R, G or B white level adjustment


Adjust the relevant channelsto 100 % white level

The actual adjustment is displayed with cur-sor in the RGB hexagon

The adjustments are judged on the colormonitor and changed until an optimumwhite level reproduction is achieved.

Note: Adjustments of White Master and White RGB do not change Black level.



3.10.8 ADJUST GRAY LEVEL (GAMMA MASTER & GAMMA RGB)


29. Color menu Controlpanel


30. Run film for adjusting the medium gray levels

Search for a film scene with amedium gradation

and stop.

31. Select Gammaslide Gamma on the screen

ColorMenu

The relevant channels becomeadjustable for the gray levels

32.

Gamma RGBmagnitude and phase for

R, G or B gray level adjustment


The actual adjustment is displayed with cur-sor in the Gamma hexagon

The adjustments are judged on the colormonitor and changed until an optimum graylevel reproduction is achieved.

33. Rewind film



3.10.9 ADJUST CONTOUR AND CORING


34. select Sharp menu Controlpanel

Fig. 347: Sharp menu

For test purposes usetestpoint 5 Sizing / Matrix / Contour

Menu Monitoring


35.

For adjustment search the ap-propriate film picture and operate

the telecine in the still framemode.

Contour adjustment: picture with fine and coarse details

Coring adjustment:picture with noise in the black areas




36.

Select Contour

This adjustment only addressesthe luminance signal.

A Black and White transition ap-pears more contrast and there-

fore sharper

Sharp menu

Set Contour correction for optimum H and Vcontour with coring set to 0%.For that adjust CONTOUR Balance toH3/V3.PEAK FREQUENCY H/V to coarse (e.g.“1”)or fine details (e.g. ”7”).

37.

Select Coring

Adjust for optimum picture con-tents with the digipot or slide on

the touch screen.

Coring enhanced contour correc-tion in dependence on detail con-

trast.

0% Coring (default setting):the selected contour correctionapplies to all details of the pic-

ture.

100% Coring: only the high con-trast details are enhanced (they

will get broad contours).

Sharp menu

Increase coring from 0% until the optimalgrain suppression in the black areas isreached. Repeat contour adjustment, if nec-essary.

38.

Select Peaking Frequency

Horizontal and Vertical

This function offers contour en-hancement in dependence ondetail size (spatial frequency)

In order to enhance small picturedetails, select a higher value.

Higher value correspond to highfrequencies.

to enhance contours of coarsedetails, select a low value.

Sharp menu

Increase Peak Frequency H&V to enhancesmall picture details.

Repeat contour adjustment, if necessary.

39. Select menu Home Controlpanel

Closes Sharp menu,stores new Contour adjustmentsand returns to the Home menu.



3.11 ADJUST AUDIO CHANNELS (OPTION)

Before leveling the audio channels, first adapt them to the studio environment.For adaption, select the Audio Config menu.This menu determines with its submenus the sequence for proceeding (from leftto right, see below).

3.11.1 SELECT AUDIO SOURCES

1. Depending on the film format (16mm, S16mm*, 35mm, S35mm*), the opticalblock suitable to the film to be played is used.

2. The film is threaded correctly and ready for play.

* S16 and S35 films have no own audio track.External audio sources, such as SEPMAG via INPUT EXTERN 1, 2 are usually selected as audio sources.


1.Touch button Audio

&select submenu A Config

Controlpanel

The Audio Configuration menu appears

Fig. 349: Audio Config menu

Requirements




2. Touch Source sectionAudioConfigMenu

Window”Input Source”

is opened

Fig. 350: Audio Config menu with pull-down menu ”Input Source”

3. Touch button Source Channel 1 Pull downmenu

Depending on the film used, select audio source for audio channel CH 1.

Magnetical for Sepmag Units

Optical for light sound

Ext 1/2 External sources

Test Tone 1 or 10 KHz

4. Touch button Source Channel 2 Pull downmenu

Select audio source for channel CH 2

5. To exit the window, click on theClose button

Pull downmenu

Close window



3.11.2 PRE-EQUALIZE AUDIO SOURCES

Note:Function “Pre-Adjust” is only operable for the service by means of a servicecode.


6. Select Preadjust section AudioConfigmenu

The window ”Pre-Adjust”appears.

This window contains basicfactory settings forpre-amplifier levels

& pre-equalizing

Fig. 351: Audio Config menu with window ”Pre-Adjust”

Both audio channels are exactly factory-preadjusted. Therefore, input level and pre-equalization need no further correction.

Adjustments have to be performed by service personnel only (special test films re-quired).

For further details see chapter 6.8 “Change Comopt Sound Lamp” in this manual.



3.11.3 ADJUST DOLBY NOISE REDUCTION


7. Touch Dolby sectionAudioConfigmenu

The window ”Noise Reduction”appears.

Fig. 352: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Noise Reduction”

8. Press Channel 1/2 Noise Red Window

Depending on the film used,(with dolbysated audio),

select the noise reduction mode.

Dolby A: not selectable

Dolby SR: Noise reduction via external dolby SRadd-on unit(SR: Spectral Recording)

OFF: Film without dolby audio




9. Press Channel 1/2 NR level Window

Adjust dolby level: (only for external dolby SR device)

1. Switch on dolby test tone on external de-vice and read deflection on its indicating instrument.

2. Play film with dolby test tone on the tele-cine and also read the deflection on the ex-ternal indicating instrument.

3. Change adjustment at the telecine untiltest tone level and telecine level show thesame reading.

Adjustment of the dolby level is made by press-ing “Gang” and turning digipot dial.

10. Press button Close Window Close window



3.11.4 SELECT LOWPASS FILTER


11. Touch Low Pass sectionAudioConfigmenu

The window ”Low Pass”appears

Fig. 353: Audio Config menu with window ”Low Pass Filter”

12. Run film(for judging the film sound)

13. Press button Channel 1/2 Low Pass

Pull downmenu

Depending on the film sound quality,switch on or off the lowpass filter.

.

None: Film audio channel is not filtered

5 kHz: Film audio channel is filtered

14. Re-wind film




3.11.5 SYNCHRONIZE DIGITAL AUDIO CHANNELS


16. Touch A/D Convert sectionAudioConfigmenu

Window ”A/D Converter Reference”appears

Fig. 354: Audio Config menu with window ”A/D Convert”

17.

Touch A/D Convert Ref&

Select int. Video

or ext. 48KHz

Window

Depending on the succeeding audio studio,lock the digital film sound of the telecineeither with its own video signal (standard)or use an external 48kHz synchronizationwhen it is also used for synchronization ofthe external audio studio.

int Video: Digital audio channels arevideo-locked

ext 48 kHz: Digital audio channels aresynchronized on 48 kHz




3.11.6 SELECT PREEMPHASIS


19. Touch Pre-Emphasissection

AudioConfigmenu

The window ”Pre-emphasis”appears

Fig. 355: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Pre-Emphasis”

20.

Press button Pre-Emphasis

& select On or Off

Window

For improving the signal-to-noise ratio priorto A/D conversion or for adaption to othercontributions in the digital audio studio,the digital audio channels of the telecinecan be provided with a preemphasis.

Pre-emph: peaking of frequency componentsprior to A/D conversion; reduction after D/Aconversion

OFF: Preemphasis off (standard)

ON: Preemphasis on(CD-type preemphasis,EQ time constant: 50/15 µs)

21. Press Close Window Close window



3.11.7 SELECT MONO/STEREO OPERATION


22. Select Channel Mode sectionAudioConfigmenu

Window ”Channel Mode” appears

Fig. 356: Audio Config menu with window ”Channel Mode”

23.

Press button Channel Mode& select

2 Channelor

Single Channel

Pull downmenu

Depending on the film used(mono or stereo film),

select the audio channel mode.

Single Channel (Mono)

Analog output 1 = audio 1Analog output 2 = audio 1

Subfr. A in the digital AES output. = audio 1Subfr. B in the digital AES output. = audio 1

2 CHANNEL (Stereo):

Analog output 1 = audio 1Analog output 2 = audio 2

Subfr. A in the digital AES output = audio 1Subfr. B in the digital AES output = audio 2




MONO (for stereo film):

Analog output 1 = audio 1 + 2 mixed* Analog output 2 = audio 1 + 2 mixed*

Subfr. A+B mixed/dig. AES output = Audio 1*Subfr. A+B mixed/dig. AES output = Audio 2*

* In order to avoid overmodulation, the out-put levels of the mixed audio signals arereduced by 4.5 dB.




3.11.8 ADJUST LIP-SYNCHRONOUS FILM SOUND


25. Press Delay sectionAudio Configmenu

The window ”Channel Delay”appears

Fig. 357: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Channel Delay”

26.

Run filmfor judging

lip synchronism.Compare picture and sound

at the studio output.

When playing a film, picture and sound arealways lip-synchronous at the outputof the telecine.The adjustable audio channel delayonly compensates film frame delays causedfor example by a succeeding video studio.

27.Adjust the delays by sliding on

the touchscreen or use the digi-pot control

Window

Depending on the delay betweenpicture and sound,

delay the film sound(for stereo in both channels).

The adjustable delay dependson the film format and is

approx. within 0 and 1.2 s(in steps of 10 ms).

28. Re-wind film




3.11.9 CHECK FILM AUDIO PATHS WITH TEST TONE


30. Press Test Tone sectionAudioConfigmenu

Window ”Test Tone”appears and the finally selected test tone is

indicated.

Fig. 358: Audio Config menu with window ”Test Tone”

31. Press button Test Tone Window Depending on the requirement,select 1 kHz or 10 kHz test tone.





33. Press Source sectionAudioConfigmenu

The window ”Setup Input Source”appears.

Fig. 359: Audio Config menu with window ”Input Source”

34. Press button Source Channel 1 / 2 Window

For turning on the test tone,select ”TEST.”

Check film audio path in the studio.

35. Press button Close Window Close window (and switch off test tone).



3.11.10 ADJUST STUDIO LEVEL


36. Press menu button Audio Levels

Controlpanel

The Audio Level menu appears.

37.Press button Setup

&button Studio Level

AudioLevelmenu

Pulldown menu ”Audio Level Setup”appears.

Note!

� The internal test tonelevel of the Telecine isat 0VU.

� Scale zero point is atthe 28% audio modu-lation level for COM-OPT.

� The zero point of thescale is set to full scaledb fs

Fig. 360: Audio Level menu with window ”Audio Level Setup”

38.Touch button Studio Leveland make your selection

in the pulldown menu

Pulldownmenu

Depending on the requirement,adjust the studio level

–3 dBu, 0 dBu, 4 dBu or 8 dBu.

Note:With unbalanced load, the audio level is auto-matically reduced by 6 dB, when a studio levelof +4 or +8 dBu is selected.

39. Press button Close Close window



3.11.11 ADAPT AUDIO OUTPUTS (BALANCED / UNBALANCED) TO STUDIO INPUTS


40. Press button Audio Level Controlpanel

The Audio Level menu appears.

41. Press button SetupAudioLevelmenu

Drop-down menu ”Audio Level Setup”appears.


42.

Touch button Channel 1/2and

make your selection“unbalanced or unbalanced”

Window

Adapt the outputs of the telecineA1, A2, Monitoring and Dolby Stereo,

according to the available studio inputsunbalanced or balanced

Note:With unbalanced load, the audio level is auto-matically reduced by 6 dB, when a studio levelof +4 or +8 dBu is selected.




3.11.12 ADJUST HEADPHONE & MONITORING VOLUME


44. Press button Audio Levels Controlpanel

The Audio Levels menu appears.

Fig. 362: Audio Level menu

45.

TouchHeadphone

Mon left (for mono) Mon Left and Right (for stereo)

attenuators

Menu

Adjust the volume controls according torequirement.

To modify, slide the controls on the touch-screen ore use the digipot controls

46. Press button Close Controlpanel

Return to the Home menu



3.11.13 ADJUST SEPMAG CHANNELS


47.Press menu button Special

&Submenu Extern D

Controlpanel

The sub menu Extern D appears.

48. Press button Sepmag Coupling Source Menu The pull down menu “Biphase / Timecode

is opened

Fig. 363: Special Menu with Submenu Extern D

49. Select Source “Biphase” Menu

50.

Select Sepmag coupling

according to theSepmag unit used

Menu

2x Biphase:for Sepmag units with 2 pulses per frame synchronization (at connection SEPMAG OUT / Rack 2)

10x Biphase: for Sepmag unitswith 10 pulses per frame synchronization

Fig. 364: Special Menu with Submenu Extern D




51. Press menu button Audio Config

Controlpanel

The Audio Config menu appears.

52. Select Input Source sectionAudioConfigmenu

The windowSource Channel 1/2

appears.

Fig. 365: Audio Config menu with window ”Input Source”

53.

Press button Source channel 1/2

&Select

Ext1 / EXT2

for Sepmag mode

Window

Select the audio sourcesaccording to Sepmag unit used(mono or stereo).

Mono:CH1, 2: each “Extern1”

Stereo:CH1: “Extern 1”CH2: “Extern 2”

54. Press key Close Controlpanel

Return to the menu



3.12 USING ARRI, AATON OR EVERTZ KEYCODE READERS

3.12.1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

These servicing instructions are for use by qualified and trained servicepersonnel only.

To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any installationsother than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you arequalified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Precaution when installing the Keycode Reader Mounting Set

� To reduce risk of electric shock, do not perform any installation without switch-ing off the STE-B1 Telecine.

� Observe EMC regulations!

To avoid EMC problems, all keycode reader cables must be wrapped in knittedwire mesh tape. The so shielded cables must be connected to ground potentialat the film deck and at the terminal panel via the corresponding cable feed-through.

Precaution when operating!Pay attention to the film guide, danger of scratching the film!

� Check the proper film run always with a test film.

� The film should never contact the knurled fixing knobs of the keycode readers.

� Do not run the film through the keycode readers when the devices are in parkposition.

� Do not change the position of the keycode reader during any operation!

� Do not use a film loop when a keycode reader is in park position.

� Do not mount single keycode heads in the positions which are designed to beused in combination of an ARRI head together with EVERTZ or AATON units.



3.12.2 GENERAL

The Keycode Reader Mounting Set is designed to facilitate the installation of the16mm / 35mm keycode readers from the manufacturers AATON, EVERTZ andARRI.

The base plate feature ”Park Position” enables to set a reader from the read posi-tion into the park position without the need to disconnect the cables of the reader.

Note:

For instructions relating to the specific adjustment of the keycode readersthemselves, please refer to the documentation of the respective manufac-turer AATON, EVERTZ and ARRI.

3.12.3 TOOLS REQUIRED

Installation of the the key code readers requires the following tools:

1. Allan key 2 mm

2. Allan key 2.5 mm

3. Allan key 3 mm

4. Phillips screw driver

5. Screw driver size 1



3.12.4 OVERVIEW MOUNTING SET

The mounting set consists of the following parts:

14pcs

657

4

8

123

Fig. 366: Contents of the mounting set

1 Mounting plate with knurled knob for ARRI reader

2 Mounting plate with knurled knob for EVERTZ reader

3 Mounting plate with knurled knob and roller for AATON reader

4 Clamping ring for damping roller

5 Cable tie, 14 pcs.

6 4 Phillips screws M3

7 4 Fixing plate for cable tie

8 10 meters shield wrap knitted wire mesh 1.5 inches wide



3.12.5 MOUNTING THE KEYCODE READERS ON THE RESPECTIVE MOUNTING PLATE

3.12.5.1 ARRI Reader

1. Lead the Mini Sub-D connector 1 Figure 367 of the ARRI reader cable from

below through the opening 2 of the ARRI mounting plate.

1

2

3

Fig. 367:

2. Fasten the Mini Sub-D connector with two screws 4 Figure 368 (parts of the

ARRI reader) on the top side of the ARRI mounting plate. Put the cable into thegroove at the bottom side of the ARRI mounting plate and fix it with the two

slotted screws 3 Figure 367.

4

Fig. 368:



3. Slide the ARRI 16mm or 35mm keycode reader 1 onto the mounted ARRI

Mini Sub-D connector 2 and fasten it with the two hex socket-head screws

3 Figure 369 (parts of the keycode reader) using an Allan key of 2.5 mm.

The keycode reader is now mounted on its base plate.

2

3

3

1

ARRI 16mm Reader ARRI 35mm Reader

1

3

3

2

Fig. 369: ARRI mounting plate and ARRI reader



3.12.5.2 AATON Reader

1

2

3

Fig. 370: AATON mounting plate and reader

Put the AATON keycode reader 1 onto the clamp fitting 2 and clamp it with

the hex socket-head screw 3 , Figures 370 and 371.

Preadjustment:Adjust the position of the AATON reader in such a way that the edge of the

reader 4 is in parallel to the edge of the mounting plate 5 , Figure 371.

1

23 45

Fig. 371: AATON keycode reader on AATON mounting plate



3.12.5.3 EVERTZ Reader

1

2

Fig. 372: EVERTZ mounting plate and reader

Put the EVERTZ keycode reader 1 onto the clamp fitting 2 and clamp it with

the hex socket-head screw 3 .

Preadjustment:

Adjust the position of the EVERTZ reader in such a way that the pin hole 4 is cov-

ered half by the EVERTZ reader.

3

1

2

4

Fig. 373: EVERTZ keycode reader on EVERTZ mounting plate



3.12.6 MOUNTING SINGLE KEYCODE READER VERSION ON THE FILMDECK BASE PLATE

Two mounting versions of the keycode readers are possible:

� Single keycode reader version

� Dual keycode reader version

The filmdeck base plate is marked with thin, bold and dot lines (Fig. 374).

Fig. 375 and Fig. 376 show the mounting positions of the keycode readers whenusing one keycode reader. The thin outlines on the base plate show the singlereader positions. The dot outlines shows the parking position of the keycode read-ers.

Fig. 374: Base plate without mounted keycode readers

Attention!

When using one keycode reader, put it only on its single position (gray areasFig. 375 and Fig. 376, thin line on the base plate). When setting readers onthe dual position, the film may be scratched!



PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

Fig. 375: One Keycode reader position (ARRI)

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

Fig. 376: One Keycode reader position (AATON/EVERTZ)



3.12.6.1 Mounting ARRI Keycode Reader

Put the ARRI keycode reader (16 or 35 mm) with its mounting plate in the providedposition for the single operation onto the base plate and fasten it with the knurled

screw 1 , see fig. 377.

AATON/EVERTZ

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

1

Fig. 377: ARRI reader in single position



3.12.6.2 Mounting AATON Keycode Reader

Put the AATON keycode reader with its mounting plate in the provided position for

the single operation onto the base plate and fasten it with the knurled screw 1 ,

see fig. 378.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

1

Fig. 378: AATON keycode reader in single position

The keycode reader has to be fasten on the clamp fitting in such a way that it doesnot impede the film run and does scratch the film.

Note!

See AATON manual for fine adjustment of the keycode reader head!



3.12.6.3 Mounting EVERTZ Keycode Reader

Put the EVERTZ keycode reader with its mounting plate in the provided position

for the single operation onto the base plate and fasten it with the knurled screw 1 ,

fig. 379.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

1

Fig. 379: EVERTZ keycode reader in single position

The keycode reader has to be fasten on the clamp fitting in such a way that it doesnot impede the film run and does not scratch the film.

Note!

See EVERTZ manual for fine adjustment of the keycode reader head!



3.12.6.4 Deflection Roller Adjustment (AATON Reader)

1

2

Fig. 380: Deflection roller adjustment

For adjusting the additional AATON deflection roller 2 , loosen the clamp screw

1 with an Allan key and adjust the deflection roller according to Fig. 381. Tighten

the clamp screw again.

2

Fig. 381: Film run adjustment

Make sure that the film edges do not touch the edges of the guide roller 2 .



3.12.7 PARKING POSITION OF THE KEYCODE READERS

ATTENTION!

Do not use a film loop when a keycode reader is mounted in parking position!

3.12.7.1 ARRI Keycode Reader

When the ARRI keycode reader is not used, mount it in its parking position. For thispurpose, loosen the knurled screw, put the reader on the parking position and fas-ten it with the knurled screw.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

Fig. 382: Parking position for ARRI keycode reader



3.12.7.2 AATON / EVERTZ Keycode Reader

When the AATON or EVERTZ keycode reader is not used, mount it in its parkingposition. For this purpose, put the reader on the parking position and fasten it withthe knurled screw.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

Fig. 383: Parking position for AATON / EVERTZ keycode reader



3.12.8 MOUNTING DUAL KEYCODE READERS VERSION

Fig. 384 shows the mounting positions of the keycode readers when being usedin dual operation. The bold lines on the base plate show the dual reader positions.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

Abb. 384: Dual reader positions



3.12.8.1 ARRI and AATON Keycode Readers

1. Put both keycode readers on their positions as dual readers and fasten them

with the knurled screws 1 , Fig. 385.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

1

Abb. 385: ARRI and AATON readers in film run

2. Check the film run.

Note!

See EVERTZ manual for fine adjustment of the keycode reader head!

1

Fig. 386: Film run adjustment

Make sure that the film edges do not touch the edges of the guide roller 1 .



3.12.8.2 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Readers

1. Put both keycode readers on their positions as dual readers and fasten them

with the knurled screws 1 , Fig. 387.

2. Check film run as above.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

1

Fig. 387: ARRI and EVERTZ readers in film run

Note!

See EVERTZ customer’s manual for fine adjustment of the keycode readerhead!



3.12.9 USAGE OF THE PARKING POSITION IN CASE OF DUAL READER VERSION

Fig. 388 shows the mounting positions of the keycode readers when being usedin combination of park and read position.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

AR

RI

Abb. 388: Possible ARRI reader parking position when using two readers



3.12.9.1 ARRI and EVERTZ Keycode Reader

Only possible in combination with ARRI and EVERTZ reader)

Put the ARRI reader 1 on the parking position and fasten it with the knurled

screw. Set the EVERTZ reader 2 to single position and fasten it also with the

knurled screw.

PARKING

position

SINGLE readers

AATON/EVERTZ

1

2

Abb. 389: ARRI reader in parking position and Evertz reader in film run

STE-B13. Operational Preparations


3.12.10 ARRESTING THE SWING ARM OF THE DAMPING ROLLER

If, under certain operational conditions (e.g. film splices) counting errors are occur-

ring with the keycode reader, the motion of the damping roller 1 can be inhibited

afterwards by arresting the swing arm with the clamping ring 2 .

For this purpose, the internal swing arm is turned to its upper end stop by loosening

the grub screw 3 and rotating the clamping ring 2 in clockwise direction, posi-

tion FIXED.

For securing the clamping ring in the new position, tighten the grub screw 3 again

with a 2mm Allan key.

123

Fig. 390: Arresting the swing arm

STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations


3.12.11 CABLING THE KEYCODE READERS

Attention!

Prior to laying the keycode reader cables they have to be wrapped with shieldwrap mesh according to section 3.12.12!

The cables of the keycode readers can be laid between the base plate and the filmdeck. Subsequently, they are fed through the corresponding cable feed-through

2 and through the Shadow Telecine to the EMC Terminal Panel. For this purpose,

fasten the reader cables with Philips screw M3 and fixing plate and cable tie to the

bores 1 of the base plate.

1

1

2

Fig. 391: Cable fastening points at the base plate

Cable feed-throughSteadiscan

Cable feed-throughAATON keycode reader

Cable feed-throughEVERTZ keycodereader

Cable feed-throughARRI keycode reader

Fig. 392: Cable feed-through in the filmdeck

STE-B13. Operational Preparations


Note! Feed always only one cable through one opening

Feed the cable through the cabinet and fasten it. Feed the cable through the con-nection terminal at the rear and ground the wire mesh at the feed-through. For de-tails refer to the Installation Manual.

3.12.12 EMV REQUIREMENTS

To avoid EMV / EMC problems, all reader cables have to be wrapped with knittedwire mesh from the cable feed-through in the film deck up to the connection termi-nal at the Shadow Telecine. Earth contact has to be made at the cable feed-through(film deck) and at the connection terminal (rear of telecine).

Fig. 393: Wrapping with knitted wire mesh shield

Fix the knitted wire mesh shield at beginning and end of the reader cable with acable tie.

STE-B1 3. Operational Preparations


4.1 Basic Menu Control GCPSTE-B1


4. MENU CONTROL

4.1 BASIC MENU CONTROL WITH GRAPHICAL CONTROL PANEL GCP

The highly sophisticated Graphical Control Panel GCP1 is designed to control theShadow Telecine. It provides equal functionality as the former Control Panel FCP1.

Note!

� The general operating instructions are described in the separate GCP Manual FU 0104 It provides short form instructions for an expert withexperiences in operating of telecines.

� Additional detailed information is available at the corresponding FCP functions, described in the following chapters

4.1.1 CONTROL AND DISPLAY ELEMENTS GCP

Prev

Ctrl

Dialog function buttons

Dialog buttons

Digipots

For future usePower to panel to machine

TK

Previous

Control

Lock

Acceleration

Help

Digits

Unity

Trackball delegation:

TK button

Trackball

Machine controls

Fig. 401: Graphical Control Panel GCP1

STE-B14.1 Basic Menu Control GCP


4.1.2 MENUSTRUCTURE OF GCP1

Home

TK Config

Film

Color

Sharp

Sizing

Audio

Special

Monitoring

Overview

RemoteSetup

Options

Film DeckSDTVHDTVDataTimecode

MatchingMasking

Primary6–SectorColor Setup

Aperture (Spirit only)Contour

SizingReproductionBlanking

Audio LevelsAudio Config

Steady ScanExtern Devices

Test PointSetupDiagnosis

Menus

Main menus Sub menus

Scream

Memo TK MemsCue

Login

Copy2x

1x. . .

. . .

GCP User, Panel andNetwork Setup

Fig. 402: Menu structure of the Graphical Control Panel GCP1

4.2 Basic Menu Control FCPSTE-B1


4.2 BASIC MENU CONTROL WITH FUNCTIONAL CONTROL PANEL

5

7

1 2 3

6

4

Fig. 403: Functional Control panel CP1

Overview

1 Menu selection keypad

2 Display

3 Function keys of menu control pad

4 Cursor keys

5 Numeric keypad

6 Digipot adjust dial

7 MFD multifunctional dial

STE-B14.2 Basic Menu Control FCP


The user controls and operates the Shadow Telecine via 12 main menus appearing

on display 2 .

The 12 main menus are selected directly by pressing a menu selection key

(”HOME”, ”SIZING”, ”FILM” etc.) on the menu selection keypad 1 .

Within the menus, the function keys 3 , the digipot adjust dial 6 , the cursor

keys 4 and the numeric keypad 5 serve to start menu-dependent switchingoperations to select or change parameters and to enter time values (time code, cuetime etc.).

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

8 9 10

1211

Fig. 404: Home menu

The following applies to all menus:

The upper part contains the information area.

8 Menu title sectiondisplays the name of the selected main menu

9 User message line

10 Actual time code displayIndicates also the presence of an diagnostic message.This diagnostic message is displayed in main menu DIAGNOSIS.

Main menu selection

Display division

Common features



The lower part contains the function selection area.

11 Softkey barDisplay of the function key assignment

12 Function keys F1 to F12 of menu control pad

The function keys F1 to F12 in the menu control pad 12 serve to select and switchfunctions or parameters, to open windows and/or activate submenus.

The assignment of the function keys is shown in the softkey bar 11 on the loweredge of the display.

If an assigned function key is pressed, the corresponding softkey is shown inverse(light background, corresponds to a lit key when a function is selected).

If the function key is pressed again, the function is deselected.

In order to ensure a high comfort for the user when operating with a great varietyof possible selections, additional windows can be shown in nearly all main menus.These windows can be opened with the corresponding function keys. The selectedwindow is superimposed in the main menu display. The changed softkey bar indi-cates the different assignments of the function keys within this window.

The assignments of the function keys outside the window (thus visible on the main menu level) do not change.

By pressing function key F11, window ”Speed Select” is opened in main menuHOME to simplify the speed selection.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 405: Home menu with window ”Focus Adjust”

The window appears in the lower part of the display. The keys F1 to F10 get newassignments. The key F11 keep its assignment.

Function keys

Open window

Example



Each window may be closed in several ways:

� By pressing the function key “EXIT” (softkey bar). This is F10 in the examplementioned above.

� By pressing the window selection key. This is F11 in the example mentionedabove.

� By pressing a main menu selection key.

In some main menus, the submenus can be selected with the function keys.

Return from a submenu to the main menu is made by pressing function key F12(EXIT) or the relevant main menu selection key.

1. Click the corresponding function key shortly to scroll down the table entry(scroll bar). This does not apply to settings of continuous values, for examplelevel adjustments.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


2. Hold down the function key (approx. 0.5 seconds) and release it again (key re-mains lit).Select and/or adjust the parameters with the adjust dial or the cursor keys. Thevalue is entered automatically. If the key is pressed again, it is deactivated andthe light will go out.

Note:

If within 20 seconds after the first setting procedure (adjust dial or cursorkeys) no other setting is executed, the key goes out automatically tomake sure that the values are not changed by mistake.

Select submenu

Exit submenu

Table selection

Close window



3. Hold the function key and at the same time select or set the parameters withthe adjust dial or the cursor keys. Release the function key, the changed valueis entered and the key goes out.

Note:

If needed, the operating procedures can be changed in the Setup menuwith set PANEL (see section 4.13.5).



4.2.1 MAIN MENU OVERVIEW FCP

This section will give a short overview of the main menus; for detailed descriptionsof the main menus see the following pages.

Appears after the Shadow Telecine has been switched on. It serves to monitor andcontrol the basic machine functions.For details see section 4.3.

The film menu shows matching adjustments, intensity of film illumination andfundamental film setup settings.For details see section 4.4.

Shows the most important film scanning and film reproduction adjustments.For details see section 4.5.

Serves to set the video parameters.For details see section 4.6.

Serves to set the timecode.For details see section 4.7.

Serves to store up to 99 cue points for exact frame search mode and recall themagain.For details see section 4.8.

Serves to adjust the analog and digital audio input and output signal levels.For details see section 4.9.

Serves to display and change the audio system configuration.For details see section 4.10.

Serves to select the test signal and the measuring points for monitor and oscillo-scope.For details see section 4.11.

Serves to set the parameters for picture reproduction with the HIPPI data channel(High Performance Parallel Interface).For details see section 4.12.

Serves to set the machine parameters which are not allocated to any other mainmenu, for example selection of the remote interface.

Moreover, it permits selecting submenu Setup PANEL which comprises fundamen-tal configurations of the control panel itself.For details see section 4.13.

Provides error and system messages for machine diagnostic and maintenance.For details see section 4.14.

HOME

FILM

SIZING

GRADING

TIME CODE

MULTI CUE

AUDIO LEVELS

AUDIO CONFIG

MONITORING

USER

SETUP

DIAGN

4.3 Home Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.3 HOME MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

8 7

654321

910

Fig. 407: Home menu

This menu appears automatically after having switched on the Shadow Telecine.

It permits the user to handle the most important machine settings and operatingmodes.

The Home menu serves to control the following Shadow Telecine functions:

� Audio output level adjustment for the audio channels audio 1 and audio 2

� Focusing and frame line settings

� Operational preparations for film deck, video and genlock

� Selection of the variable film transport speed (in frames/s)

Pressing key ”Home” on the control panel enables to return from any other menuto the main menu Home.

Overview

1 Menu title section;shows the name of the selected menu

2 User message line

3 Display of current time code (TC)Display in hours : minutes : seconds : frames

4 Display of cue time for exact frame search

F 1

F 2

STE-B14.3 Home Menu FCP


5 Display of film supply (not shown in the standby off mode)The remaining film time is displayed as a black bar (and alphanumeric).The entire film time is displayed as a white field and can be read at its rightside in minutes (or feet).When starting the film, the black and white fields are congruent and limitedto the right by the hatched field.

6 Actual time code display and indication that an internal diagnostic messageis present. The diagnostic message is displayed in the main menu.Diagnosis (see section 4.14).

7 Scratch pad for manual entry of values with the numeric keyboard (Fig. 403

on page 4-3 point 5 ).The entered value can be used as follows:

� Cue time point transferPressing the key ”IN” in the key panel transfers the value into the Cue

time display (Fig. 407 point 4 ).

� Cue time point transfer and search modePressing the key ”Search” on the Control Panel transfers the value into

the Cue time display (Fig. 407 point 4 ) and starts a search run to thevalue taken over as a cue time point.

� Setting time code generator (film timer)Pressing the function key F6 (set FTC) transfers the entered value intothe film timer.

8 General information window; provides short information about essential ba-sic setting.

9 Operating display of the film deck; informs about film drive mode (PLAY,SEARCH, STEP), film run direction, film speed, stop status, if no film isthreaded (”NO FILM”) and indicates that the Shadow Telecine is operatingin the remote mode (”no contr.”).

10 Audio level display; indicates the current audio levels of the two audio chan-nels (CH 1 and CH 2) as well as the current position of the level controls foraudio Out 1 and 2 ( ).

Adjust channel CH 1For adjusting the audio output levels CH 1. Activates function key F3, see section4.3.1.

Adjust channel CH 2For adjusting the audio output levels CH 2. Activates function key F3, see section4.3.1.

Function keys

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 11

F 12



Not assigned.Display ”resol COARS” only active when function key F1 or F2 is operated, seesection 4.3.1.

Set FOCUSFocus adjustment on or off

Set FRAMEopens window, see section 4.3.2.

Set FTCsets the current film timecode.Pressing the function key transfers the entered value of the scratch pad into the filmtimer.

Test PATTNTest signal on or off. The preselection of the test signal (staircase, sawtooth, colorbar) is made in the Monitoring menu.Test PATTN ON: test signalTest PATTN OFF: film signal

Setup FILMDopens submenu, see section 4.13.2.

Setup VIDEOopens submenu, see section 4.13.3.

Setup STDRDopens a window in the setup menu, see section 4.13.1.Exit (F12) of the window returns to the Home menu.

Select SPEEDopens window, see section 4.3.4.

Select SCREAMopens window, see section 4.3.5.



4.3.1 ADJUST CHANNEL CH 1, CH 2

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

F 3 activated

Fig. 408: Home menu with activated function key F 3

Function key F3 is selected and activated by actuating function key F1 (or F2) inthe Home menu (see fig. 408: F 3).

Repeated pressing of function key F3 enables to switch over from a coarse setting(COARS) to a fine setting (FINE) of the audio output levels for audio 1 (or audio 2).When switching to FINE, the audio level display is changed over to a more sensitivedisplay.

COARS: 0 dB ... –48 dB (see Fig.408)FINE: –6 dB ... –24 dB (see Fig. 409)

Adjustment of the two audio channels is made separately with the digipot (adjust

dial) on the control panel (Fig. 403 point 6 ).The two filled triangles move on the display bar upwards or downwards to the de-sired setting value.

Press function key F1 (or F2) i.e. deselect CH 1 (and CH 2). After approx. 20 s, deselection is carried out automatically.

Display:–6 dB to –24 dB

Fig. 409: Home menu with a more sensitive audio level display

Closefunction key F 3

F 6

F 7

F 8



4.3.2 SET FOCUS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 410: Home menu with window ”Focus Adjust”

Focus field will lit after actuating function key F 4 ”set FOCUS” in main menu”HOME”.

In this rode, the Shadow Telecine is focused optically to the film material used.For optimum focus adjustment it is useful to zoom into image and focus on thegrain.For a better detection of the grain, the coring adjustments in the Film and Gradingmenus should be set to 0% and at least the aperture correction should be set tomaximum.

The following functions can be selected via function keys.

STOREActive only in the service mode.Stores the current focus setting as a ”unity” value (default value).

press ADJSTAfter pressing function key F 7, the optical focus is now adjusted with the digipot

adjust dial on the control panel (fig. 403 6 ).

The display (over ”press ADJST”) shows the selected focus adjustment in form ofa five-digit number. Thus, focus adjustments become reproducible.

EXITCloses window ”Focus Adjust”.

Alternatively, press function key F12 or again F4.

Close window

Function keys

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 11



4.3.3 SET FRAME

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 411: Home menu with window ”Framing Adjust”

Window ”Framing Adjust” is opened by actuating function key F 5 ”set FRAM” inmain menu ”HOME.”

In this window, the frame line of the film frame is coarsely shifted into the verticalblanking interval and thus made imperceptible.


STOREActive only in the service mode.Stores the last framing adjustment as a ”unity” value (default value).

coarse DOWNSoftkey assignment only available for 35mm film.After pressing function key F 8, the frame line is shifted by 1/4 of picture heightdownward.

coarse UPSoftkey assignment only available for 35mm film.After pressing function key F 9, the frame line is shifted by 1/4 of picture height up-ward.

adjust FINEAfter pressing function key F 10, the softkey display changes to ”use pot FINE”. Theframe line is adjusted with the digipot adjust dial on the control panel (see fig. 403

6 ).The display (over ”adjust FINE”) shows the selected frame line in form of a five-digitnumber. Thus, framing adjustments become reproducible.

EXITCloses window ”Framing Adjust”.

Function keys

Close window

F 1 F 5to

F 6

F 7 F 8to



4.3.4 SELECT SPEED

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 412: Home menu with window ”Speed Select”

Window ”Speed Select” is opened by actuating function key F11 ”select SPEED”in main menu ”HOME.”

This window serves to adjust the fixed or variable film speed for the Shadow Tele-cine.

Fixed film speeds at 625/1250L/50Hz:6 1/4, 12 1/2, 18 3/4, 25 and 50 frames/sas well as a preselected variable film speed (SAS = Select a Speed)

Fixed film speeds at 525/1125L/60Hz:6, 12, 18, 24, 30 and 48 frames/sas well as a preselected variable film speed (SAS = Select a Speed)

Variable film speeds SAS:

Range from 2.000 to 57.000 fps for all standards


Select speedFixed film speeds, selectable according to TV standard.

Select speed SASThe Shadow Telecine is changed over to a variable film transport speed. The soft-key display (over softkey ”set SAS”) shows the variable film speed adjusted last.The Shadow Telecine will then run at this speed.

Not assigned in this TV standard

Function keys

F 9

F 10



Set SASActivation of variable SAS film speed.The SAS value is entered with the numeric keypad of the control panel and storedunder function key F6 after having pressed key F9.

The softkey display (over ”set SAS”) shows the selected film speed setting in formof a figure. Thus, variable SAS speeds become reproducible.

EXITCloses window ”Speed Select”.

Alternatively, press function key F12 or again F11.

4.3.5 SELECT SCREAM

Windows “Scream” is opened by actuating function key F12 “SCRM” in main menu“Home”

The control parameters of the Grain Reducer SCREAM are grouped into an op-erational and a setup parameter’s section.

Details see in the separate Customer’s Manual SGR 2000 SCREAM Grain Re-ducer:

FU 0107, 0 126 630 700

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 413: Home menu with window ”SCREAM”

Close window

4.4 Film Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.4 FILM MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

654321

Fig. 413: Film menu

This menu appears after pressing the menu selection key ”FILM” on the control panel.

It shows the user the matching settings in the black and white areas, the intensityof film illumination, the video level and the film setup settings (film type and videobasic gain).

Overview

1 Menu title section;shows the name of the selected menu

2 Display of RGB matching settings in the black areas

3 Display of RGB matching settings in the white areas

4 Display of intensity of film illumination

5 Display of film video level

6 General information window; gives information about the film setup settings(see section 4.4.2).

F 1 F 6to

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 11

F 12

STE-B14.4 Film Menu FCP


Matching black or matching gain R, G, Bserves for setting the RGB black level or RGB white level matching.Adjustment is made by pressing the relevant function key and turning the adjust dialon the control panel.When exiting the menu, the last matching setting is stored.

Illumination ADJUSserves for setting the intensity of film illumination.Adjustment is made by pressing function key F7 and turning the adjust dial on thecontrol panel.When exiting the selection, the last illumination intensity value is stored.

Illumination SHOTserves during PLAY for setting the intensity of film illumination once to 100 % videolevel.

set COEFFserves the color adaption for different film types via masking adjustment or fixedmasking coefficients selection.opens submenu, see section 4.4.1.

unity ALLadjusts standard values for the film menu.

film SETUPopens window “Film Setup”, see section 4.4.2.

Function keys



4.4.1 SET FILM MASKING

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

comm_1comm_2comm_3comm_4comm_5comm_6comm_7comm_8

spec_3spec_4spec_5spec_6spec_7spec_8

TCP5285TCPLIMX

54321

Fig. 414: Submenu ”film masking”

The submenu ”Film Masking” appears after pressing key F9 ”set COEFF” in themain menu Film.

This submenu serves the color adaption to the actually used film.Adaption is made optionally by selection of fixed (F3, F4) or variable (F5) maskingcoefficients.Print, intermediate, primetime and color films are adaptable (positive and negativefilms, see section 4.4.2).

Overview

1 Submenu title section;displays the name of the selected submenu

2 Display of the actual masking adjustment (from F2 to F4).

3 5- Represents the following matrix equation:

R outG outB out

=C1 C2 C3C4 C5 C6C7 C8 C9

R inG inB in

3 4 5

4 Display of the actual masking coefficients C1 to C9

Fixed masking coefficients, see next paragraph.



Fixed masking - coefficients, 1 - 5 for TAF (Telecine Analysis Film) optimized (status3/96):

Item Matrix Name Masking Coefficient Kodak Film Type

1 TCNEXR1 Color Negative TAF log. masking

R’ = 0.90 R + 0.05 G + 0.05 BG’ = 0.00 R 1.05 G – 0.05 BB’ = 0.00 R 0.05 G + 0.95 B

5279

2 TPT5600 Primetime Negative TAF log. masking

R’ = 1.14 R – 0.13 G – 0.01 BG’ = 0.00 R 1.04 G – 0.04 BB’ = 0.04 R + 0.16 G + 0.80 B

5600

3 TIM5244 Intermediate Positive TAF log. masking

R’ = 0.94 R + 0.05 G + 0.01 BG’ = 0.05 R + 1.09 G – 0.14 BB’ = 0.02 R + 0.04 G + 0.94 B

5244

4 TCP5285 Print Low Contrast Positive TAF log. masking

R’ = 1.00 R – 0.06 G + 0.06 BG’ = – 0.05 R + 1.11 G – 0.06 BB’ = 0.00 R – 0.08 G + 1.08 B

5285

5 TCPLIMX Print Low Contrast Positive TAF linear matrix

R’ = 0.98 R – 0.03 G + 0.05 BG’ = – 0.05 R + 1.10 G – 0.05 BB’ = 0.00 R – 0.05 G + 1.05 B

5285

6 KIM5244 Intermediate Positive Normal log. masking

(Not TAF, but film scenes optimized)R’ = 1.05 R – 0.05 G 0.00 BG’ = – 0.05 R + 1.10 G – 0.05 BB’ = 0.02 R + 0.04 G + 0.94 B

5244

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7 F 9to

F 10

F 11

F 12



switch OFFMasking switched off.

select COMMSelection of different basic sets.

select SPEC(IA)LSelection of different film-dependent masking sets in the format: XYYZZZZ (X = manufacturer, Y = film type, Z = film identification)e.g.: KCN5247 = Kodak Color Negative 5247

X YY

K = Kodak CP = Color Print

G = Agfa CN = Color Negative

F = Fuji IM = Intermediate

T = Test PT = Primetime

selectable: TCNEXR1, TPT5600, TIM5244, TCP5285, TCPLIMX, KIM5244

masking USERswitches over to user-defined masking (adjustments cannot be stored).

select ROWSelects R, G or B row.Adjustment is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial orpressing the cursor keys on the control panel.

select R, G, Bselect the column of the R, G or B masking coefficients.Adjustment is made by pressing the relevant function key and turning the adjust dialon the control panel.When exiting the menu, the last matching setting is stored.

mode LINMainly used when correcting positive films(projection-related correction).

mode LOGMainly used when correcting negative films(scene-related correction).

EXITCloses submenu ”Film Masking”.

Function keys

Close window



4.4.2 FILM SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 415: Window ”film setup”

Window ”Film Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu”FILM.”

This window serves to set the configurations for film type and analog basic gain.

The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor keys onthe control panel.Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F8 are used to change theswitching states.

Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) exits the submenu and returns to main menuFILM.

Overview

The meanings and the selection possibilities of the individual parameters are ex-plained below.

”Film type” defines film type used.

Possible selections:print POS / NEGintermediate POS / NEGprimetime POS / NEGcolor POS / NEG



F1 ”print POS” used with print films, POS: negative inversion OFF

F2 ”print NEG” used with print films, NEG: negative inversion ON

F3 ”intermediate POS” used with intermediate films, POS: neg. inversion OFF

F4 ”intermediate NEG” used with intermediate films, NEG: neg. inversion ON

F5 ”primetime POS” used with primetime films, POS: neg. inversion OFF

F6 ”primetime NEG” used with primetime films, NEG: negative inversion ON

F7 ”color POS” used with color films, POS: negative inversion OFF

F8 ”color NEG” used with color films, NEG: negative inversion ON

F3-F8 film types with orange mask are optically compensated. Intermediate, pri-metime and color (POS or NEG) film types have different “orange mask compensa-tions”.

The “print POS” selection creates an illumination spectral balance that, in conjunc-tion with electronic masking or matrixing, will allow color reproduction of color printfilms approximating that achieved with optical projection.The “print NEG” selection creates an illumination spectral balance that allowsscans of unmasked or b/w negative films.

The “intermediate POS or NEG” selection creates an illumination color spectral bal-ance with sensitivity peaks that closely match the film dye density peaks of East-man EXR Color Intermediate Film 5244. This mode of illumination also compen-sates for the red, green and blue minimum densities (D-min) caused by coloredmasking colored coupler found in the Eastman EXR Color Intermediate Film 5244stock.

The “primetime NEG” selection creates an illumination color spectral balance thatis optimized for the characteristics of low-contrast Eastman Primetime negativefilm.The “primetime POS” selection creates an illumination color spectral balance toscan positive films with an orange mask close to prime time NEG films.

The “color NEG” selection creates an illumination color spectral balance with sensi-tivity peaks that closely match typical camera negative film dye density peaks. Itis recommended that for using Eastman Color Intermediate II Film 5243 in POS orNEG.

”ANLG GAIN”defines the (analog) basic gain of the video amplifier.

Possible selections: 0 dB / 6 dB

F1 ”0 dB ” simple basic gain x 1

F2 ”6 dB ” double basic gain x 2

Note!

Print POS or NEG

Intermediate POS or NEG

PrimetimePOS or NEG

Color POS or NEG

4.5 Sizing Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.5 SIZING MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

7654321


This menu appears after pressing menu selection key ”SIZING” on the controlpanel.

The menu shows the user the most important film scanning and film reproductionsettings for sizing.

The sizing menu shown above, applies to 35mm/4perf films.For 16mm films and negative films, the display shows 16mm symbols or invertedsymbols.

The sizing menu serves to control the following settings:

- Repro settings- Rotation setting- Display of the repro data- Repro area marking- Adjustment of the film blanking- Resetting to standard values- Sizing setup settings

Overview

1 Menu title section;displays the name of the selected menu

2 Display of the repro adjustments H/V size, position and zoom

3 Maximum film frame scanning area (stored area)

4 Selected film scanning format (scanning area)

5 Reproduction area of the film frame

F 1 F 3to

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 12

STE-B14.5 Sizing Menu FCP


6 Information section; gives short information about additional sizing setupsettings (see section 4.5.3).

7 Current time code display; in addition, the display shows the presence of aninternal diagnostic message. The diagnostic message is displayed in themain menu Diagnosis (see section 4.14).

Reproduction SIZE, POS and ZOOMAdjustment of H and V size, position and zoom of the reproduction format.Horizontal adjustment is made with the MFD multifunction dial, vertical adjustmentwith the adjust dial on the control panel after pressing the corresponding functionkey.When exiting the selection, the last repro adjustment is stored.

Scan EFFECTChanges the angle of rhombic distortion of the film frames horizontal or vertical inthe range of �30o.The horizontal or vertical effect preselection is made in the Sizing Setup windowwith function key F12, parameter “scan effects”.Adjustment is made after pressing the function key with the MFD (Multi FunctionDial) on the control panel.When exiting the selection, the last rhombic distortion adjustment is stored.

Adjust ROTAT (option)with rotating angle display, used for rotating the film frame (adjusting range: �1800).Adjustment is made after pressing the function key with the adjust dial on the con-trol panel.When exiting the selection, the last rotation adjustment is stored.Select various rotation speed in menu “Setup Panel 4.13.5”

Repro DATAopens window, see section 4.5.1

Area MARK marks the repro range with marker lines.Horizontal adjustment is made with the MFD multifunction dial, vertical adjustmentwith the adjust dial on the control panel.

Adjust BLANKopens submenu, see section 4.5.2

Unity VARresets all variable sizing adjustments (SIZE, POS and ZOOM) to standard values.

SETUPOpens window, see section 4.5.3

Function keys

F 5



4.5.1 REPRO DATA

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 417: Window ”Reproduction data”

Window ”Reproduction data” is opened by pressing function key F6 ”repro DATA”in main menu ”SIZING”.

The window shows the user the most important sizing settings of the Shadow Tele-cine (film format, scanned/reproduced size and position).

EXITCloses window ”Reproduction data”.

Close window

F 1 F 2to

F 3 F 4to



4.5.2 ADJUST BLANK

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

720 x 540359 x 269

0

539

7 711

321

Fig. 418: Submenu ”Blanking”

The submenu is opened by pressing function key F8 ”adjust BLANK” in main menu”SIZING”.

The user adjusts in this submenu the film and TV blanking or resets the blankingto standard values.

Overview

1 Display of the adjustments for film and TV blanking

2 Display of the actual blanking in the active film frame

3 Size and position of the absolute TV blankingin pixels and lines

film-blanking SIZE and POSserves for adjusting the horizontal or vertical size/position of the film blanking. Thefilm blanking determines the frame section which is read in into the frame store.Horizontal adjustments are made with the MFD multifunction dial, vertical adjust-ments with the adjust dial on the control panel after pressing the correspondingfunction key.When exiting the selection, the last film blanking adjustment is stored.

TV-blanking SIZE and POSserves for adjusting the horizontal or vertical size/position of the TV blanking. TheTV blanking determines the frame section which is read out of the frame store.Operation and storage as described under F1, F2.

Function keys

F 6

F 12



Display ”effective blanking type”:

shows the blanking type, which effects the actual position and size of the repro-duced film frame.

scan: optical block determines the blankingfilm: film blanking determines the blankingtv: TV blanking determines the blankingmonit.: video standard determines the blanking

unity BLANKall blanking adjustments are reset to standard values.

EXITcloses submenu ”Blanking”.

Close window

F 1

F 2



4.5.3 SIZING SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 419: Window ”Sizing Setup”

This Window is opened by pressing function key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”SIZ-ING”.

This window serves to set additional sizing adjustments.

When opening the window first, the lit softkey (F1) corresponds to the standard set-ting (later to the last selection).

Overview

The meanings and the selection possibilities of the individual parameters are ex-plained below.Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4.5.3.1 Sizing setup“zoom mode”

Serves to change the zoom from nonlinear to linear mode Selection:

”NONLI(NEAR)”standard Shadow sizing:linear programmed dissolves of ZOOM and PAN are performed nonlinear

”LINEA(R)”new enhanced Shadow sizing:linear programmed dissolves of ZOOM and PAN are performed linear

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2



4.5.3.2 Sizing setup ”auto unity”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 420: Sizing Setup

The selection ”fixed aspect” or ”fixed repro” resets all sizing adjustments to stan-dard values.

Selection:

”OFF ”no reset to standard values

”ON”switch over to standard values

4.5.3.3 Sizing setup ”ACA-emul”

Enables to operate ACA films with super objectives (by adjusting the blanking).With comopt sound films, we recommend to change the appropriate film gate addi-tionally (option).The Film gate covers the comopt sound track with an iris frame.

Selection:

”OFF”ACA emulation OFF

”ON”ACA emulation ON

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2



4.5.3.4 Sizing setup ”Cinemascope”

Sizing format enables cinemascope reproduction.

Selection:

”OFF”cinemascope OFF

”ON”cinemascope ON

4.5.3.5 Sizing setup ”H-flip”

Horizontal film frame flipping.

Selection:

”OFF”no horizontal film frame flipping

”ON”film frame is horizontally flipped

4.5.3.6 Sizing setup ”V-flip”

Vertical film frame flipping.

Selection:

”OFF”no vertical film frame flipping

”ON”film frame is vertically flipped

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9



4.5.3.7 Sizing setup ”fixed aspect”

Diverse fixed film aspect sizes selectable (values only for ”fixed repro” OFF).

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Selection:

”CA/AC”full aperture film scanningor ”FA”(CA: camera aperture; AC: ACA emulation; FA: full aperture)

”PROJ”rojection window reproduction

”ISO”reproduction in conformity with ISO 2907

”2.35”for films with a picture aspect ratio of 1 : 2.35





”EXIT”closes window, returns the user to the sizing menu

Hint:Invalid ”fixed aspect” formats are displayed on the output monitor as a small hor-izontal picture window

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4



4.5.3.8 Sizing setup ”fixed repro”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Following fixed reproduction formats are selectable.

Selection:

”OFF”full aspect format visible on the monitor

”4:3”output picture is reproduced with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.33 (4:3 monitor)

”16:9”output picture is reproduced with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.78 (16:9 monitor)

”DATA”output picture is reproduced with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.85 (format for cinemascope)

F 1

F 2



4.5.3.9 Sizing setup ”SDTV-ratio”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 423: Sizing setup

Picture aspect ratio for the TV output picture.

Selection:

”4 : 3”4:3 output picture

”16 : 9”16:9 output picture

F 1

F 2



4.5.3.10 Sizing setup ”16mm mode”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Horizontal center correction for 16mm films.

Selection:

”DIN”horizontal center correction in conformity with DIN 1602, part 7 and ISO DIS 5768standard

”ISO”horizontal center correction in conformity with ISO 5768 (1981)

F 1

F 2

F 3



4.5.3.11 Sizing setup ”rhombic effects”

Check rhombic effect by playing a checker board film loop.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 425: Window “Sizing setup”

This Window is opened by pressing function key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu ”SIZING”.

Choose parameter “scan effects” from the table Sizing Setup.

Selection:

”OFF”rhombic distortion disabled

”RHO-H”setup rhombic distortion horizontal

”RHO-V”setup rhombic distortion vertical

Change the angle of rhombic distortion in the range of � 30� with the Multi Func-tional Dial.

F 1

F 2



4.5.3.12 Sizing setup ”sizing base”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Switches over the sizing base

Selection:

”ANA(LOG) O(UT)”sizing base effects the analog output

”DIG(ITAL) O(UT)”sizing base effects the digital output



4.5.4 FIXED FILM FORMATS

Note!

Tolerances for all fixed film formats, caused by the scanner unit, the testfilmand reading errors may sum up to �0.2 mm.

Exceptions:At format values marked with *, the tolerances may sum up to �0.5 mm, withoption “Rotation”.At format values marked with �, the tolerances may sum up to �0.5 mm,without option “Rotation”.

4.5.4.1 35 mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate

sizing setup scanned area

aspect repro scan width scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]

CA / AC off 24,45 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning area

CA / AC 1,33 24,45 18,34� 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning width => 4:3

CA / AC 1,78 24,45 13,75 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9

CA / AC 1,85 24,45 13,22 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1

PROJ off 23,50 17,50 17,48 DIN 15502–6 projection area

PROJ 1,33 23,50 17,63� 17,48 EBU R86–1997 (DIN 15502–6 width => 4:3)

PROJ 1,78 23,50 13,22 17,48 EBU R86–1997 (DIN 1550–6 width => 16:9)

PROJ 1,85 23,50 12,70 17,48 DIN 15502–6 width => 1,85:1

2,35 off 23,50 10,00 17,48 ARRI–1985 projection area 2,35:1

2,35 1,33 13,33 10,00 17,48 2,35:1 => 4:3 PanScan

2,35 1,78 17,78 10,00 17,48 2,35:1 => 16:9 PanScan

2,35 1,85 18,50 10,00 17,48 2,35:1 => 1,85:1 PanScan


2,20 1,33 14,24 10,68 17,48 2,20:1 => 4:3 PanScan

2,20 1,78 18,99 10,68 17,48 2,20:1 => 16:9 PanScan

2,20 1,85 19,76 10,68 17,48 2,20:1 => 1,85:1 PanScan


1,85 1,33 16,93 12,70 17,48 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan

1,85 1,78 22,58 12,70 17,48 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan

1,85 1,85 23,50 12,70 17,48 ARRI–1985 projection area 1,85:1

Table 401



4.5.4.2 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate

sizing setup scanning area

aspect repro scanwidth

scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]

CA / AC off 21,25 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA = FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max.scanning area

CA / AC 1,33 21,25 16,00 18,75 ISO 2906 height => 4:3

CA / AC 1,78 21,25 11,95 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9

CA / AC 1,85 21,25 11,49 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1

ISO off 20,12 15,09 18,75 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE96M

ISO 1,33 20,12 15,09 18,75 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE96M

ISO 1,78 20,12 11,32 18,75 ISO 1223 width => 16:9

ISO 1,85 20,12 10,88 18,75 ISO 1223 width => 1,85:1

1,85 off 21,11 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection area 1,85:1

1,85 1,33 15,11 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan

1,85 1,78 20,14 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,85:1 => 16:9 Pan-Scan

1,85 1,85 20,96 11,33 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height 1,85:1 => 1,85:1 Pan-Scan



1,75 1,78 21,11 11,87 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,75:1 => 16:9

1,75 1,85 21,11 11,41 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,75:1 => 1,85:1



1,66 1,78 21,11 11,87 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,66:1 => 16:9

1,66 1,85 21,11 11,41 18,75 ISO 2907 projection width 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

Table 402



4.5.4.3 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate, Anamorphic



scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]


CA / AC 1,33 12,67 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 Pan-Scan

CA / AC 1,78 16,89 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9PanScan

CA / AC 1,85 17,57 18,80 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 1,85:1PanScan

PROJ off 23,80 18,34 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope projection area(Shadow Telecine)

PROJ 1,33 12,23 18,34� 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope => 4:3 PanScan

PROJ 1,78 16,30 18,34� 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope => 16:9 PanScan

PROJ 1,85 16,96 18,34 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA Cinemascope => 1,85:1 PanScan

Table 403

4.5.4.4 35mm, 4 Perf, Full Aperture LGA, ACA Gate, Anamorphic



scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]

CA / AC off 21,25 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA = FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max.scanning area

CA / AC 1,33 12,55 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan

CA / AC 1,78 16,73 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9 Pan-Scan

CA / AC 1,85 17,41 18,80 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 1,85:1 Pan-Scan

2,35 off 21,25 18,21 18,75 derived from ISO 2907 projection area anamorphic

2,35 1,33 12,14 18,21� 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 4:3 Pan-Scan

2,35 1,78 16,19 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 16:9PanScan

2,35 1,85 16,84 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 1,85:1PanScan

2,20 off 20,03 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 2,20:1PanScan

1,85 off 16,84 18,21 18,75 ISO 2907 projection height anamorphic => 1,85:1PanScan

Table 404



4.5.4.5 35mm, 3 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate



scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]


CA / AC 1,33 18,73*� 14,05 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 Pan-Scan

CA / AC 1,78 24,45 13,78 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9

CA / AC 1,85 24,45 13,24 17,48 FSB FA 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1

PROJ off 23,50 13,22 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf projection area (ShadowTelecine)

PROJ 1,33 17,63 13,22 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf proj.height (Shadow Tele-cine) => 4:3 PanScan

PROJ 1,78 23,50 13,22 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf projection width (ShadowTelecine ) => 16:9

PROJ 1,85 23,50 12,70 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA 3 Perf projection width (ShadowTelecine) => 1,85:1

Table 405




scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]

CA / AC off 21,25 14,05 18,75 FSB 35 LGA = FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max. scan-ning area

CA / AC 1,33 18,73*� 14,05 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan

CA / AC 1,78 21,25 11,95 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9

CA / AC 1,85 21,25 11,49 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning width => 1,85:1

PROJ off 20,96 12,63 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection area 1,66:1

PROJ 1,33 16,84 12,63 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection height 1,66:1 => 4:3 PanScan

PROJ 1,78 20,96 11,79 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,66:1 => 16:9

PROJ 1,85 20,96 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

1,85 off 20,96 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection area 1,85:1

1,85 1,33 15,11 11,33� 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan

1,85 1,78 20,14 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection width 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan

1,85 1,85 20,96 11,33 18,75 Panavision 1987 projection area 1,85:1

Table 406



4.5.4.7 35mm, 2 Perf, Full Aperture LGA and Gate


aspect repro scan width scan height centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]

CA / AC off 24,45� 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning area

CA / AC 1,33 12,43*� 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3PanScan

CA / AC 1,78 16,57*� 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9PanScan

CA / AC 1,85 17,24*� 9,32 17,48 FSB FA35 LGA max. scanning height =>1,85:1 PanScan

Table 407




scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]

CA / AC off 21,25 9,32 18,75 FSB FA35 LGA + FSB 35 GB max. scanning area

CA / AC 1,33 12,43*� 9,32 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3 PanScan

CA / AC 1,78 16,57*� 9,32 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 16:9 Pan-Scan

CA / AC 1,85 17,24*� 9,32 18,75 FSB 35 LGA max. scanning height => 1,85:1 Pan-Scan

PROJ off 20,96 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257 stereoscopic, symmetrical

PROJ 1,33 11,99� 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257, symmetrical height => 4:3 PanScan

PROJ 1,78 15,98 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257, symmetrical height => 16:9 PanScan

PROJ 1,85 16,63 8,99 18,75 SMPTE 257, symmetrical height => 1,85:1 Pan-Scan

Table 408



4.5.4.9 16mm Scanning Formats, Super 16mm LGA and Gate



scanheight

centerline

centerline

[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] remark

DIN ISO

CA / AC off 12,48 ** 7,52 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning area

CA / AC 1,33 10,03 7,52 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning height => 4:3PanScan

CA / AC 1,78 12,48 7,02 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning width => 16:9

CA / AC 1,85 12,48 6,75 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning width =>1,85:1

PROJ off 11,64 7,01 9 9,15 ISO 1223 16mm height => 1,66:1 projectionarea Shadow Telecine

PROJ 1,33 9,35 7,01 9 9,15 1,66:1 => ISO 1223 4:3 PanScan

PROJ 1,78 11,64 6,55 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 16:9

PROJ 1,85 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

1,85 off 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 projection width Shadow Telecine =>1,85:1

1,85 1,33 8,39 6,29 9 9,15 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan

1,85 1,78 11,19 6,29 9 9,15 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan

1,85 1,85 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 projection width Shadow Telecine =>1,85:1

1,66 off 11,64 7,01 9 9,15 ISO 1223 16mm height => 1,66:1 projectionarea Shadow Telecine

1,66 1,33 9,35 7,01 9 9,15 1,66:1 => ISO 1223 4:3 PanScan

1,66 1,78 11,64 6,55 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 16:9

1,66 1,85 11,64 6,29 9 9,15 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

Table 409

** = Scan width will be reduced if center position “16mm mode = ISO” (menu Sizing - F12) is selected.



4.5.4.10 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate



scanheight

centerline remark

[mm] [mm] [mm]

CA / AC off 9,75 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning area

CA / AC 1,33 9,75 7,31 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width=> 4:3


CA / AC 1,85 9,75 5,27 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width=> 1,85:1

PROJ off 9,65 7,26 7,98 EBU R86–1997 (ISO 359–1977, ANSI/SMPTE233–1987 proj.area)

PROJ 1,33 9,65 7,24 7,98 EBU R86–1997 (ISO 359–1977 width => 4:3)

PROJ 1,78 9,65 5,43 7,98 ISO 359–1977 width => 16:9

PROJ 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 ISO 359–1977 width => 1,85:1

ISO off 9,35 7,01 7,98 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE96M

ISO 1,33 9,35 7,01 7,98 ISO 1223, DIN 15502–2, EBU R86–1997, SMPTE96M

ISO 1,78 9,35 5,26 7,98 ISO 1223 scanning width => 16:9

ISO 1,85 9,35 5,05 7,98 ISO 1223 scanning width => 1,85:1

1,85 off 9,65 5,22 7,98 ISO 359–1977, ANSI/SMPTE 233–1987 projectionwidth => 1,85:1

1,85 1,33 6,96 5,22 7,98 1,85:1 => 4:3 PanScan

1,85 1,78 9,27 5,22 7,98 1,85:1 => 16:9 PanScan

1,85 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 1,85:1


1,75 1,33 7,35 5,51 7,98 1,75:1 => 4:3 PanScan

1,75 1,78 9,65 5,43 7,98 1,75:1 => 16:9

1,75 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 1,75:1 => 1,85:1


1,66 1,33 7,75 5,81 7,98 1,66:1 => 4:3 PanScan

1,66 1,78 9,65 5,43 7,98 1,66:1 => 16:9

1,66 1,85 9,65 5,22 7,98 1,66:1 => 1,85:1

Table 410



4.5.4.11 16mm, Super LGA and Gate, Anamorphic



scanheight

centerline

centerline

[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] remark

DIN ISO

CA / AC off 12,48 ** 7,52 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning area



CA / AC 1,85 6,95 7,52 9 9,15 FSB S16 LGA max. scanning height =>1,85:1 PanScan

Table 411

** = Scan width will be reduced if center position “16mm mode = ISO” (menu Sizing - F12) is selected.

4.5.4.12 16mm, Super 16mm LGA, 16mm Gate, Anamorphic



scanheight

centerline

[mm] [mm] [mm] remark

CA / AC off 9,75 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning area



CA / AC 1,85 6,95 7,52 7,98 FSB S16 LGA + FSB 16 GB max. scanning width=> 1,85:1

2,35 CA off 8,82 7,47 7,98 SMPTE 65–1991: 2,35:1 ACA 35mm => 16mmcont.dupli. NEG area

2,35 CA 1,33 4,98 7,47 7,98 2,35:1 CA scanning height => 4:3 PanScan

2,35 CA 1,78 6,64 7,47 7,98 2,35:1 CA scanning height => 16:9 PanScan

2,35 CA 1,85 6,91 7,47 7,98 2,35:1 CA scanning height => 1,85:1 PanScan

2,35 off 8,59 7,31 7,98 Shadow Telecine projection area 2,35:1

2,35 1,33 4,88 7,31 7,98 2,35:1 => 4:3 PanScan

2,35 1,78 6,50 7,31 7,98 2,35:1 => 16:9 PanScan

2,35 1,85 6,77 7,31 7,98 2,35:1 => 1,85:1 PanScan

Table 412

4.6 Grading Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.6 GRADING MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

4321

Fig. 427: Grading menu

The ”Grading” menu is selected by pressing the menu selection key ”GRADING”on the control panel.

The Grading menu includes the following setting possibilities:

� Setting the black, white and gamma values (optionally RGB locked via ”MASTR” or individually via ”RGB”)

� Settings for contour, coring and chrominance

� Setup 6-Sector Color Correction

� Setup settings

Overview

1 Color circle display for the individual, separate, RGB black level setting(black RGB). The circle displays for gamma and white are set up similarly.

2 Horizontal bar graph for the locked RGB black level adjustment(black MASTR). The setting displays for gamma MASTR and white MASTRare similar.

3 Setting displays for contour, coring and chrominance

CONTU = H- and V contour correction(subjective improvement of the picture sharpness)

CORNG = Prevents a sharp figure of noise detailsCHROM = Color saturation adjustment

4 General information window; gives short information about the SETUP ad-justments which can be selected with function key F12 in the Grading menu.

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

STE-B14.6 Grading Menu FCP


The following adjustments can be selected via function keys.

black RGBFor adjusting the individual RGB black levels.A point in the RGB color circle indicates the current RGB adjustment.A changed RGB black level adjustment is shown by a changed position of the pointin the RGB color circle.After pressing function key F1, the RGB adjustment can be made for the magnitudewith the adjust dial and for the phase with the MFD multifunctional dial.

black MASTRLocked RGB black level adjustment(without changing the current RGB adjustment).

gamma RGBSame functions as function key F1, but applies to the individual RGB gamma val-ues.

gamma MASTRSame functions as function key F2, but applies to the locked RGB gamma.

white RGBSame functions as function key F1, but applies to the individual RGB gain values.

white MASTRSame functions as function key F2, but applies to the locked RGB gain values.

adjust CONT(O)U(R) For adjusting the contour correction in the luminance channel (via adjust dial) withassociated +/– display.The contour correction starts with ”0” and increases with ”+” values and decreaseswith ”–” values. For optimum adjustment Coring should be set first to 0%.The contour correction contains following grading setup adjustments:Contour Gain Balance, Peak Frequency H and Peak Frequency V (all available via function key F12 SETUP and adjust dial).

adjust COR(I)NGReduces the contour enhancement for fine low contrast details like grain. The stan-dard value 0% applies the selected amount of aperture enhancement to all details.

adjust CHROM(INANCE)For adjusting color saturation (via adjust dial) with associated display.

unity ALLPressing the function key resets changed level settings to standard values.The points in the RGB circles and the bar graphs jump back to the center.

Function keys

F 11

F 12



6SC Pressing the function key opens the submenu 6SC, it serves for setting the secon-dary color correction. Operation of the secondary color correction is described ina separate manual which is supplied when buying this option.Customer Manual “Mounting & Operating Instructions 6SC”, FU 0095, order no. 0 126 629 500.

SETUP (opens window, see section 4.6.1)Grading basic settings



4.6.1 GRADING SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 428: Grading menu with window ”Grading Setup”

Window ”Grading Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu”GRADING.”

This window serves to adjust grading basic settings.

Selection of the individual parameters is made with digipot ”adjust dial” or the cur-sor keys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment changes in theopened window.Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F8 are used to change theswitching status.

Pressing function key F9 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window andreturns the user to main menu GRADING.

Overview

The meanings and the possible selections of the individual parameters are ex-plained below.Factory adjustments are bold printed.

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2 F 6to

F 7

F 9



4.6.1.1 Grading Setup menu ”CRT GAMMA” (Cathode Ray Tube)

Shadow Telecine signals additionally get a fixed gamma pre-equalization whichcorresponds to the crt characteristic curve of a display monitor.

For this reason, a pre-equalized staircase signal of the Shadow Telecine is repre-sented linear on the monitor again.

Selection: ON / OFF

”OFF”Crt gamma off (for test purposes when setting into operation)

”ON”Crt gamma on (during operation)

Note!For the conversion modes TVLEV and GRLEV, CRT gamma is normally switched“ON”, but may be switched “OFF” for pure linear video signals.In all other data conversion modes CRT gamma is not selectable but “ON” - withexception mode LOG CRT gamma is “OFF” - to achieve the transfer characteristicof the selected data conversion mode.

4.6.1.2 Grading Setup menu ”COLOR”F

For switching off the color information.

Selection: ON / OFF

”OFF”for black/white films

”ON”for color films

4.6.1.3 Grading Setup menu ”CONTOUR GAIN BAL.”

For balance adjustment between H and V contour correction (fading in 7 steps).

Selection: H only / H3/V1 / H3/V2 / H3/V3 / H2/V3 / H1/V3 / V only

”H only”only H contour correction adjustable

”H3/V1, H3/V2, H3/V3, H2/V3, H1/V3”H and V contour correction adjustable

”V only”only V contour correction adjustable

”EXIT”closes the window, goes back to the grading menu

CRT gamma for“Data conversionmodes”

F 1 F 3to

F 4 F 6to

F 7

F 8

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5



4.6.1.4 Grading Setup menu ”PEAK FREQUENCY H or V”

For adjusting the range of the horizontal or vertical peak frequency.

Selection: 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / EXIT

”1 - 3”contour correction effects on coarse details

”4 - 6”contour correction effects on fine details

”7”contour correction effects on very fine details

”EXIT”closes the window, goes back to the grading menu

4.6.1.5 Grading Setup menu “Ranges”

Parameter for the ranges of the primary color correction, see also chapter 4.6.1.10

Selection: NORM / EXTD

”NORM”normal (standard) values of the primary color correction

“EXTD”extended ranges for the primary color correction

4.6.1.6 Grading Setup menu “Black Gamma Mode”

Selection: H_CO / L_CO / LINEA / L_STR / H_STR

“H_CO”High black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 5%

“L_CO”Low black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 12%

“LINEA”Linear level, no changes

“L_STR”Low black stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 28%

“H_STR”High black stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 35%

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7



4.6.1.7 Grading Setup menu “White Gamma Mode”

Selection: H_CO / L_CO / LINEA / L_STR / H_STR

“H_CO”High white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 95%

“L_CO”Low white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 88%

“LINEA”Linear white, no changes

“L_STR”Low white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 70%

“H_STR”High white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 61%

4.6.1.8 Grading Setup menu “6 SC limiter”

The 6 Sector Color Processor provides a built-in color legalizing for RGB signals.The following adjustments can be made:

“OFF”Full Cr / Cb range -7% ...108%

“S108”Limited RGB range, luminance soft limit -7% ...108%

“H 108”Limited RGB range, luminance hard limit -7% ...108%

“S102”Limited RGB range, luminance soft limit 0% ...102%

“H 102”Limited RGB range, luminance hard limit 0% ...102%

“S100”Limited RGB range, luminance soft limit 0% ...100%

“H 100”Limited RGB range, luminance hard limit 0% ...100%

“S” stands for soft limit luminance signal, where a knee characteristic is applied.

“H” refers to hard limit luminance signal, clipping is applied.



Attention!The RGB value is given for the output of the 6SC Board, not for the outputof the telecine.The output signal will be further processed using contour and sizing setupparameters.“6 SC limiter” processing may have an effect on the maximum RGB values.

4.6.1.9 Grading Setup menu “6 SC illegal color” (mark)

If “ON”, all illegal colors, according to the selected limit mode will be highlighted byinverting the luminance signal.

Note!It is recommended to set the limit mode to “S108” and the “6 SC illegal colorto “OFF” when using the 6SC color correction.



4.6.1.10 Extended Color Correction Ranges

Test & Operating Sequence

1. For testing, select menu Monitoring

2. Press F1 select PATTN

3. Choose test signal SAW_14 - F3 select PATTN - use adjust dial or cursor key

4. Press F4 pattern ON

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

saw_14

saw_14

Fig. 429: Monitoring Menu

5. Select menu Grading

6. Set all parameter to unity ALL - F10

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 430: Grading Menu

7. Select F12 SETUP from the menu Grading

8. Select parameter RANGES from the table GRADING SETUP



9. Set extended ranges with - F2 EXTD

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

M_Burst10%90%60% ARE

Fig. 431:

10. Close window GRADING SETUP - F9 EXIT

“Extended ranges” are now activated with the controls lift, gamma and gain

F1 lift RGB Range from –100% to +100%F2 lift MASTR Range from –100% to +100%F3 gamma RGB Range �60% of Master Range F4 gamma MASTR Range from 0 to 2.5F5 gain RGB Range from 0% to 200%F6 gain MASTR Range from 0% to 1000%

Attention!In “extended range” mode, Unity All results in a different grading comparable to“normal ranges”;gain changes to 500% of the standard value and gamma changes from 1 to 1.25.Changing from “normal range” to “extended range” - and in the other way round -requires a re-adjustment of black (lift) , gamma and white (gain).

Details of “Unity” adjustment for extended range, see chapter 4.6.1.12.



4.6.1.11 Grading Recommendation in “Extended Range” Mode

In order to reduce the reciprocal influence of the controls, it is recommended to startadjustment with gamma, then do lift and finally gain.

With F4 - Master gamma (0 - 2.5), the peak level of the “saw_14 test signal” canbe changed from 42% up to 100% and down to 7.5%.

F 3 F 4

MASTER gamma

2.5 0.5

Fig. 432:

In “normal range”, Master gamma addresses only the grey values of a film sceneand changes not the black and white levels.

In “extended range”, Master gamma also changes black and white.

F3 - RGB Gamma changes the Master Gamma value between 40% to 160%.

After gamma adjustment, it is recommended to adjust the black level with the liftcontrols F1 and F2 close to 0%. Note that in extended ranges the lift controls alsoaffects the white level.Both, lift Master and lift RGB can be changed in the range of �100%, but the sumis limited to �100%.

F 1 F 2 Lift �100%

Fig. 433:

Gammaadjustment

Lift adjustment



Finally adjust the white level of the saw-14 signal with gain to the desired value.

F5 - Gain RGB range 0% - 200%F6 - Gain Master range 0% - 1000%

F 5 F 6 gain MASTER 0% - 1000%

gain RGB 0% - 200%

Fig. 434:

4.6.1.12 Adjustment of the Unity Values in the “Extended Range” Mode

For the “normal mode” and UNITY for all color corrections, you will see a straightsawtooth line on the waveform monitor.

When switching color corrections between “normal” to “extended range” mode theprevious settings are not scaled to the other control range and the look of the imagechanges!

If the neutral position of “extended mode” is not yet stored on your telecine control-ler, it can be found by the following procedure:

1. Select the 100% sawtooth test signalMenu Monitoring - F1 select PATTN - F3 saw

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 435:

Gain adjustment



2. Select menu Film - F12 film SETUP - F1 print POS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 436:

3. Set all matching controls to UNITYMenu Film - F11 unity ALL

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 437:

4. Switch CRT Gamma OFFMenu Grading - F12 SETUPCRT Gamma - F1 OFF

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 438:



5. Select “extended ranges”Menu Grading - F12 SETUP - Ranges - F2 EXTD

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Fig. 439:

If you switch to “extended range “ mode, you will get a curved and clipped saw-tooth signal.By using the Shadow color correction controls of the telecine controller you cannow adjust and straighten the sawtooth line again. Please store Black, Gammaand White controls as UNITY for the “extended range” mode on the telecinecontroller.

The Grading menu displays the “unity values” in “extended mode” as shown in thenext figure.

F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6

MASTER gamma 1

MASTER gain 100%

Fig. 440:

The Shadow specifications do not apply to “extended range” mode. Us-ing “extended range” may result in lower signal-to-noise distortion, de-pending on the adjustments.

Adjustment Unity Values

Unity inExtended RangeMode



4.6.1.13 High Density Range in Print NEG Mode

In PRINT NEG mode, a higher density range on negative film with no orange maskcan be scanned in “extended range” mode.

The density range is extended beyond the standard range (0 - 2) up to 0 - 4.This feature is activated when “extended range” is selected in the Grading menu

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Fig. 441:

and the film type PRINT NEG is chosen in the Film menu - F12 film SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 442:



4.6.1.14 Black Stretch / Compression

With black stretch/compression the contrast in dark picture areas can be either en-larged or reduced. Four different characteristics according to the diagram in figure 444 are available. Unlike Master gamma, bright picture areas are less affected bythis adjustment. The black level is kept constant as well.

To use black stretch/compression, select menu Grading

1. Press F12 SETUP.

2. Choose parameter BLACK GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUP.The Grading Setup window is now opened.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 443:

The different curves in black are:

F1 H_CO High (big) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 5%F2 L_CO Low (small) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 12%F3 LINEA linear level, no changesF4 L_STR Low (small) black stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 28%F5 H_STR High (big) white stretch: e.g. 20% level changes to 35%

White

Black

100%

0%

small stretch

big stretch

big compress

small compress

Fig. 444: Black stretch / compression



4.6.1.15 White Stretch / Compression

With white stretch/compression, the contrast in bright picture areas can be eitherenlarged or reduced. Four different characteristics according to the diagram in fig-ure 446 are selectable. Unlike Master Gamma, dark picture areas are less affectedby this adjustment. Note that white stretch does not lead to any clipping of highlights(luminance levels above 100%).

To use white stretch / compression, select menu Grading

1. Press F12 SETUP

2. Choose parameter White GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUPThe Grading Setup window is opened.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 445:

The different curves in white are:

F1 H_CO High (big) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 95%F2 L_CO Low (small) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 88%F3 LINEA linear level, no changesF4 L_STR Low (small) white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 70%F5 H_STR High (big) white stretch: e.g. 80% level changes to 61%

small stretch

big stretch

big compress

small compress White

Black

100%

0%

Fig. 446:



4.6.1.16 Black and White Gamma combined

By combining black and white compression, a print film look can be generated.

To use this, select menu Grading.

1. Press F12 SETUP

2. Choose parameter BLACK GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUPThe Grading Setup window is now opened

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 9

Fig. 447:

The different curves for black compression are, see figure 449

F1 H_CO High (big) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 5%F2 L_CO Low (small) black compression: e.g. 20% level changes to 12%

F3 LINEA linear level, no changes

3. Close window Grading Setup by pressing F9 EXIT

4. Then press F12 SETUP again

5. Choose parameter White GAMMA MODE from the table GRADING SETUP.The Grading Setup window is opened.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 9

Fig. 448:



The different curves for white compressed are, see 449

F1 H_CO High (big) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 95%F2 L_CO Low (small) white compression: e.g. 80% level changes to 88%F3 LINEA linear level, no changes

100%

0%

White

Black

big white compress

small white compress

big blackcompress

small blackcompress

Fig. 449: Combining black and white compress

4.7 Time Code Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.7 TIME CODE MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

321 4

Fig. 450: Time code menu

The ”Timecode” menu is selected by pressing the menu selection key ”Timecode”on the control panel.

The menu serves to adjust the frame accurate counting of film frames, keycode(4 perf 35mm film and 1perf 16mm film ) and Linear Timecode.

LTC compatible to the SMPTE 12M standard is available at J41 B LTC OUT Rack3and will always be generated in “non drop frame mode”.

Assignment of userbitsIf a keycode reader is installed, the keycode will be mapped into the userbits

Restrictions of LTC operation

� LTC transfer via TE 4101 Transfer Engine Package 101The transfer of LTC via Transfer Engine 101 to a workstation (e.g. OS2 / SGI)causes a fixed delay of one frame. Example: Shadow Telecine sends LTC00:00:00:00, Transfer Engine reads 00:00:00:01.Problem will be solved with one of the next software releases.

� LTC synchronizing for SEPMAG playersDo not feed the audio signal of an externally connected Sepmag player, syn-chronized with LTC output (J41 B LTC OUT Rack 3) from the STE-B1, throughthe audio system of the STE-B1 - Audio 1/2 In to Audio 1/2 Out - for a signalmix of STE-B1 audio and Sepmag audio.In this case audio is delayed versus video, because it passes the telecine audiodelay which is active for audio, coming from the audio head of the Shadow Tele-cine.A Sepmag player synchronized with the bi-phase signal (J 56 SEPMAGOUT Rack 2) from the STE-B1 operates correct, audio / video are synchro-nal.

F 2

F 6

STE-B14.7 Time Code Menu FCP


� Drop frame / Non drop frame modeDrop-frame compensation for the 59.94 Hz standard is not supported.The Shadow operates always in “non drop frame mode”.That means, that for film speeds 30 or 24 fps and TV standard “59.94 Hz inter-lace” always 30 / 24 timecode values are generated.

� Counting mode for progressive standardsFor all 59.94 / 60 Hz progressive standards one time code value is allocatedto two frames.

Overview(see Fig. 450)

1 Display of the current keycode (embedded in DPX data)

2 Display of current time codeDisplay in hours : minutes : seconds : frames (hh : mm : ss : fr fr)

3 Selection of the time code frame count mode

4 Settings of LTC (Linear Time Code) - for future use!

Keycode SETUP from the Timecode menuFor adjusting the reader head offset as described in chapter 4.7.2.1 or 4.7.2.3, acti-vate the function key F2.Window “Keycode Setup” will be opened, see chapter 4.7.1.

set ATTRBSelection of the standard-dependent timecode operation mode.Selection is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F6 (toggle mode).

Following frame count modes are selectable:

24 frames: for 24 frames/sec and 60 or 59.94 Hz video systems25 frames: for 25 frames/sec and 50 Hz video systems30 frames: for 30 frames/sec and 60 Hz video systems30 comp.*: for 24 frames/sec and 60 or 59,94 Hz video systems

* Note:30 comp. = 30 frames compensated

In 24 fps mode the frames are numbered from 0 to 29, but eachfifth digit is dropped: 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,

10,11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 21,22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 28, 0, 1, 2,....

Function key

F 9



set MODE

Serves to select linear timecode operation mode.

Following LTC count modes are selectable:

“TV-TCGEN” In this mode the LTC signal is locked to the TV signal and has tobe used when the timecode output of the film scanner is connectedto the timecode input of a video tape recorder.For every video frame, a unique timecode number will be generated. For 24 fps film speed and 59.94 /60 Hz TV-systems the repeat rateof video fields is taken into account.This mode can only be used with the following settings:

TV Standard Film speed TC-Attrib

1 50Hz 25 fps 25

2 59.9Hz/60Hz ** 24 fps 24

3 59.9Hz/60Hz ** 30 fps 30

4 24 progressive 24 fps 24

5 59.94Hz/60Hz pro-gressive

24 fs 24 ***

** = non drop frame mode*** = Two frames are allocated to one time code value

“Film-fixed” Operates like mode TV-TCGEN, but the frame numbers are always related to film.Therefore TC numbers with the same value can be transmittedmultiple times at slow speeds.Frame numbering is done according the ATTRIB setting (functionkey F6)

“Film-variable” In mode FILM-variable, the LTC frequency is variable in the range from 12 fps to 57 fps. For every video frame a unique timecode number will be generated.For all other speeds the FILM-fixed mode will be used automatically.Frame numbering is done according the ATTRIB setting (functionkey F6).

Note!LTC displayed in the TC-field of each main menu is calculated according tothe LTC of the Timecode Menu (see also parameter “ATTRB” F6).

F 11

F 5

F 6

F 7



set DELAY“0” no delay of LTC signal “1 - 3” 1 - 3 frame(s) delay of LTC signal

Different delays can be selected in order to match the timecode signal with delays introduced by other external devices.LTC setting can be selected between 0 and 3 frames. The defaultdelay after a power-up is 0 frames.Changing LTC delay is only accepted when the filmdeck is in STOP mode.

Delay selection is made by pressing function key F11 and turningthe adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortlytouching F11 (toggle mode).

4.7.1 KEYCODE SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 451: Timecode submenu “Keycode Setup”

Window “Keycode Setup” is opened by actuating function key F2.The window serves to set the keycode parameter “Keycode position” and “headoffset” manually or via learn mode automatically.

set POSITserves to set Keycode position (always perf 1 for 16mm films) and determine the“Zero Frame Reference Mark” at the perforation holes 1 - 4 for 35mm film.

learn STARTstarts the learn mode for setting the “Head offset” in “perforation holes”.

set HEADserves to adjust the “Head offset” in “perforation holes” manually.



4.7.2 CHECKING AND OPERATING KEYCODE GENERATION

The operating procedure applies to keycode data reproduction and insertion intothe ancillary data of the HiPPI output, generated by a keycode reader from themanufacturers EVERTZ and AATON Keylink System V.8.

� Currently the system operates only with 4 perf 35mm and 1 perf 16mm filmscorrect.

� The errorfree counting of the keycode offset for 3 perf 35mm films can be sup-ported with a software change by AATON / Evertz and Thomson. This will beavailable later as a software upgrade.

� 2, 6 and 8 perf film material are not supported from the AATON and EVERTZkeycode reader.

Note concerning Keycode Reader setup!

The setup procedure for 16mm and 35mm (1, 3, 4 perf) film material is the same.

1. Check the connection from the keycode reader head to the reader device (de-coder).

2. Check the connection from the keycode reader device (decoder)

EVERTZ:“Serial I/O” to the keycode reader input of Shadow Rack 2 - Keycode In J 69(9-pin / RS232).

CableEvertz 5500 / 5550 STE-B1 Sub-D 9-pin (male) Sub-D 9-pin (male)3 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Tx2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Rx5 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 GND

AATON:“Keylink Com 1” to the keycode reader input of STE-B1 Rack 2 - Keycode InJ 69 (9-pin / RS 232).

Cable 1AATON STE-B1 Sub-D 25-pin (male) Sub-D 9-pin (male)3 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 2 Tx2 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 3 Rx7 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 5 GND25 9

Cable 2 (is part of the AATON Keylink System)

Keylink PC “MTC board top socket” to the bi-phase sync signal output of STE-B1Rack 2 - TC Gen out - J 51 (9 pin / control interface)

EVERTZ / AATONKeycode Reader

Pre-conditions&Restrictions

J 69

Keycode In

Rack 2Various out

J 51

TC Gen out



3. Only for AATON Reader!Adjust bi-phase pulse to one pulse per frame.

Select menu SETUPPress F5 - setup FILMDChoose parameter “TCgen out coupling” and set F3 -1*BP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 452: Setup Menu

4. Thread a 16mm or 35mm film with keycode.

5. Select Play mode

6. Adjust the keycode reader settings (film type, intensity, ...) as described in thekeycode reader manual (EVERTZ/AATON).

7. Open the Timecode menu

The current keycode should be displayed, “count” and “offset” values shouldchange.

Note!If question marks are displayed, repeat step 5!

F 1 F 2 F 3

Fig. 453: Section of the Time Code menu



8. Select STOP mode

9. Enter F2 - Keycode SETUP from the Timecode menuWindow “Keycode Setup” will be openedAdjust the reader head offset as described in chapter 4.7.2.1 or 4.7.2.3

10. Check that the correct reader type is displayed in the keycode setup window,reader type:EVERTZ, AATON or ARRI

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Reader Type AATON or EVERTZis recognized via RS 232 interface Rack 2 - J 69 KEYCODE IN


4.7.2.1 Manual Setup

1. Set head offset in “perforation holes” (default value: 60)Distance (amount of perforation holes) between reader head and film gate;approx. 60 perfs or 15 frames for a 35mm 4 perf film.Use the numeric keypad to insert the “head offset” value.

2. Set keycode position (always “perf-1” for 16mm films)F5 set POSIT

Determine the “Zero Frame Reference Mark” at the perforation holes 1 - 4, forexample “perf 3” as shown in the next figure.

AdjustReader offset

Zero FrameReference Mark



5666 + 01 5666 + 00

Zero FrameCount + Offset

5665 + 15

Manuf.ID

Film ID

ReelID

Film Length

Zero Frame reference mark“keycode position perf. 3”

Bar Code

22 2324 5666

1234

35mm 4 perf Film with Keycode

Fig. 455:

Keycode position and head offset are set manually!

F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10

Fig. 456: Keycode Setup

3. Check the keycode

Play a short piece of film and take care that any keycode is read on the readerdevice and compare the keycode of the currently scanned frame with the dis-played code in the Timecode menu.



Field Keycode

Count: Film length in feetOffset: Frame offset (e.g. 0 - 15 for 4 perf 35mm film)

5678

F 1 F 2 F 3

Count = Film lenght in feet Offset = Frame offset

Prefix = Ident of film roll

Fig. 457: Section of the Timecode menu

4.7.2.2 Remarks concerning the keycode numbering

Important!In general the system ensures that the keycode numbering related to the filmframes is always correct for the different film (1, 3, 4) perforations.

To avoid an ambiguity of the keycode to the film frame the keycode offset is calcu-lated according to “SMPTE Recommended Practice RP 195-1998” as follows:Keycode number repetition rate K (64 perf) modulo the frame repetition rate R(e.g. 4 perf per frame for a 4 perf 35mm film).

For details, see the next table.

Offset matching for 35mm films

Keycode number repetition rate = 64 perfs!

Frame RepetitionRate

Perf/FrameKeycode Count Offset

3 xxxx +00 .... +20 (21 frames) foot1/2/4/5+00 .... +21 (22 frames) foot 3/6/...

4 xxxx +00 ... +15 (16 frames)

Defining the first foot of 3 perf films:The first foot is the foot in which the reference mark appears within the first K-mo-dulo-R perforations.

Keycode numberingfor 3, 4, perf 35mmfilms



Example:In numbering the frames of 35mm 3 perf, by convention, the first foot and secondfoot each include 21 frames, numbered +00 through +20, and the third foot includes22 frames, numbered +00 through +21. The first foot is the foot in which the reference mark appears at the first perforationafter the frame line at the start of the foot, as shown below.

5666 + 01 5666 + 00

Zero FrameCount + Offset

5665 + 21

Manuf.ID

Film ID

ReelID

Film Length

Zero Frame reference mark“keycode position perf. 1”

Bar Code

22 2324 5666

12

35mm 3 perf Film with Keycode

3

5665 + 20

Fig. 458:

Offset matching for 16mm films

Keycode number repetition rate = 20 perfs!

Perf/Frame Keycode Count Offset

1 xxxx +00 .... +19

Keycode numberingfor 1 perf 16mm films



4.7.2.3 Learn Mode “Head Offset”

1. Mark a reference frame on the filmand note the respective keycode (count) printed on the film edge and the offsetwhich is the number of frames between the keycode and the marked frame.

2. Park the film at the reference frame (Film gate position)

3. Set count and offset of the reference frame from step 1.Timecode menuF2 SETUPSet both with the numeric keypad.

4. Set keycode position (always “per 1” for 16mm films)F5 set POSIT.Determine the perforation hole which is marked with the dot of the “Zero FrameReference Mark” (for example “perf 3” as shown in figure 455).

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


5. Press F6 learn START

While the Shadow is in the “learn mode”, softkey F6 function changes from“START” to “STOP” . Using F6 “STOP” aborts the “learn mode”.

6. Rewind a short piece of film

Select PLAY mode and transfer the scene which includes the reference frame.Take care, that at least one keycode is read during this transfer.If the Shadow has learned the head offset successfully, learn mode softkeyF6 changes its function again to “START”.If an error occurs during this procedure, a warning message will be displayed.Then you have to retry the head offset learning procedure.



7. Check the keycodePlay a short piece of film and take care that any keycode is read on the readerdevice and compare the keycode of the currently scanned frame with the dis-played code (count & offset) in the Timecode menu.Field Keycode:Count: FIlm length in feetOffset: Frame offset

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 460: Time code menu

4.7.2.4 Remarks concerning “Keycode in Data”

� For inserting keycode in DPX data, the option TE 4101 Transfer Engine Pack-age including FY 4345 Data Output board and the serial I/O Hippi interface isrequired.

� The keycode generated in the Shadow Telecine is only available in the DPXData, not at the video outputs.

� Keycode is only evaluated if the servo is locked.

� If keycode “count” and “offset” do not match to the right frame, please checkthat the keycode position (reference dot) and “head offset” are properly adjus-ted.

� If the keycode position (reference dot position) changes during a transfer witha fixed speed, the system automatically adjusts the new position. Note for EVERTZ Reader!This works only, if at least one keycode before the position change and one key-code after the change are read with the same speed and play direction.

� The reader type is automatically adjusted after the reader has read and trans-ferred any key code to the STE-B1.

� Additional information about the keycode standard see also www.kodak.com.

Data Output

Servo Locked

If counterrors occur

Auto Adjust

Reader Type

The Standard

4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.8 MULTI CUE MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

00 : 01 : 38 : 0700 : 01 : 38 : 1400 : 01 : 38 : 2100 : 01 : 39 : 0000 : 03 : 46 : 0000 : 03 : 48 : 2100 : 03 : 52 : 00

567

87654321

11 910

Fig. 461: Multi Cue menu

The ”Multi Cue” menu is selected by actuating the menu selection key ”MULTICUE” on the control panel.

In this menu, up to 99 cue entries for film frame search can be selected and saved.

Menu functions:

� Cue entry

� Selection of the entry mode

� Display of the cue entry list

� Graphic display of the cue entry positions

� Display of TC, TT, UB

Overview

1 Symbolic display of the film

2 Pointer for current film position, symbolizes the cue read head

3 Display of up to 7 cue entries to the left and up to 7 cue entries to the right

of the marker 2 , which are within the defined area on display 11 (maxi-mum dist. from act:).To the right of the marker are the cue entries already passed, to the left arethose ones not yet reached.

The distance between the cue entries and the mark 2 in the graphics cor-responds to the distance of the cue entries to the cue read head on the film.If, for reasons of space, this distance cannot be indicated, the cue entries willclose up in the graphics.

STE-B14.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP


4 Display of up to eight already passed cue entries contained in table 6 (in

form of small points), which are outside the area defined on display 11 .The number of displayed points (up to eight) corresponds to the actual num-ber of the already passed cue entries. With more than 8 cue entries, the dis-play does not change anymore. In the left reel are shown the still following

cue entries outside the area defined on display 11 .

5 Cue entry table with cue entry numbers (1 to 99) for selecting a field in

table 6 . The pointer following the roller bar, points in table 6 to the fieldin which a new cue entry value is to be entered.

6 Cue entry table with up to 99 cue entry values. The film position selected withthe roller bar is reached after pressing key ”Search.”

The Multicue menu offers the following possibilities for making cue entries:

� Entering via the numeric keyboard and the ”In” key.

� Transferring current time code values as cue entries via the ”In” key on the Cuepanel.

� Transferring current time code values as cue entries via the ”In” key outside thismenu (after selection of ”script CUE”).

� Transferring ”In” points FREEZE outside this menu (after selection of ”script FRZ”).

7 Film supply display in minutes or feet.For details see section 4.3.

8 Current display of times code (TC), tape time (TT) or user bits (UB)Display in hours : minutes : seconds : frames.

9 Cue time display for search run in hours : minutes : seconds : frames.

The value of a selected field in table 6 is transferred to this point.Pressing key ”Search” starts a search run to this film position.

Note:

The displays 8 and 9 are identical with those in the Home menu (see section 4.3).

10 Entry field for manual input of cue entries by means of the numeric keyboard.Pressing key ”In” on the Cue panel transfers the entered value to the field

selected via table 5 in table 6 . That field is selected to which the pointer

beside table 5 is pointing.

Entry

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

4.8 Multi Cue Menu FCPSTE-B1


11 Display and entry field of maximum distance to the current time code posi-

tion. Up to 14 cue entries, 7 to the left and 7 to the right of the mark 2 , beingwithin the indicated area, are displayed as boxes.Values outside this area, are displayed as small points in the left or right reelof the film symbol.

The small white field under display 11 points to the source delivering thedisplay (max. DIST).

auto INCR

Being activated (softkeys INCR lights), the cue entry selected in table 6 , isreached each time key ”Search” is pressed. Subsequently, the roller bar automati-cally moves in the table to the next entry underneath. The key operates in togglemode (on/off).

script CUEBeing activated (softkey CUE lights), the respective time code is entered as a cue

entry to table 6 independent of the currently selected menu, each time the keyis pressed on the Cue panel. The value is written to that place being marked by the

pointer of the cue entry table 5 .

The key operates in toggle mode (on/off).

When ”script CUE” is not activated and the entry field 10 is empty, the respective

time code is transferred as a cue entry to table 6 only with selected Multicuemenu by pressing the ”In” key.

script FRZBeing activated (softkey FREEZE lights), the respective time code is entered as a

freeze point to table 6 each time the ”In” key on the Cue panel is pressed inde-pendent of of the currently selected menu. The value is written to that place being

marked by the pointer of the cue entry table 5 .The key operates in toggle mode (on/off).

When script FREEZE is not activated and the entry field 10 is empty, the respec-

tive time code is transferred as a cue entry to table 6 only with selected Multicuemenu by pressing the ”In” key.

max. DISTPressing F4 and turning the adjust dial adjusts the area before and after the current

time code position on display 11 , where cue entries are to be displayed on the filmgraph as a box with inserted continuous number.

clear ONE

Pressing this key deletes the selected cue entry in table 6 (by means of the

pointer beside table 5 ). This has the effect that the next position in table 5 isselected.

Function keys

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 11

F 12

STE-B14.8 Multi Cue Menu FCP


set pointer ENTRY

Key for selecting an entry field in table 5 . The pointer moving at the right of the

table, points to the field in table 6 where the next cue entry is to be entered orfrom which the entered value is to be deleted with F5. Selection is made by pressingF6 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursor keys respectively, or shortlytouching F6 (toggle mode).Pressing key ”Unity” switches directly to the beginning of the table.

set pointer CUE

Key for selecting a cue entry in table 6 . The value is automatically transferred

to the display 9 . After pressing key ”Search”, this cue entry is cued up.Selection is made by pressing F7 and turning the adjust dial or pressing the cursorkeys respectively, or shortly touching F7 (toggle mode).

Note:

The possibility to shift the entry and the cue cursor separately, permits stor-ing new entries on a defined position of the list while the cue entry list is runin the search mode.This option can be switched off with F8 (tables GLUE).

tables GLUEBeing activated (softkey GLUE lights), the roller bars ”glue” together in the tables

5 and 6 . With this, the entry field selected via table 5 is always identical with

the cue entry selected in table 6 . Both roller bars are shifted with F6 or F7.The key operates in toggle mode (on/off).

Attention!

Cue entries might here be overwritten accidently!

If tables GLUE is not activated, the entries in the tables 5 and 6 can beselected separately.

clear ALL

Clear key for all entries in table 6 .Having actuated the key, an operator request appears on the display (Press againto clear all).Only after having actuated F9 once more, all entries will be cleared.

Not assigned.

Not assigned.

Not assigned.

4.9 Audio Level Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.9 AUDIO LEVEL MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

6

54321

Fig. 462: Audio Level menu

Main menu ”Audio Level” is selected by pressing key ”AUDIO LEVEL” on the con-trol panel.

In this main menu, all adjustments are made with respect to the reproduction levelsof the two audio channels and the audio monitor outputs.

Overview

1 The signal sources for the two audio channels shown on this display areselected in main menu ”AUDIO CONFIG.”

2 This display shows the scaling used for the output levels (position of the0dB mark).Adjustment is made in the window ”Audio Level Setup” (section 4.9.1).

3 The ”OUTPUT LEVEL” display shows the current audio output levels of theaudio channels CH 1 and CH 2 in a bar graph.The display is provided with a peak value hold (holding time approx. 2 se-conds).In case of overflow of an audio channel, an additional bar appears at the up-per end of the scale during the hold time. The above example shows audiochannel CH 2 overflow.The function key below each of the two level displaysshows the relevant channel number.The scaling of the level displays can beadjusted. The position of the 0dB mark is defined in window ”Audio LevelSetup” (section 4.9.1). The resolution can be switched over with function keyF2.

Signal sources

Scaling

Peak holdand overflowdisplays

STE-B14.9 Audio Level Menu FCP


The triangles at the left of the bar graph symbolize input level adjustments, thetriangles at the right side symbolize output level adjustments.

In ”Unity”, the level adjustments are positioned on –6 dB of the maximum level (full-scale).This leads to an adjusting range of +6 dB to 90 dB for the input and output signals(audio off).

4 The ”HEADPHONE” display serves the adjustment of the headphone vol-ume and is assigned to headphone output socket HEADPHONE (audio con-nector panel, rack 1).The headphone permits a monitoring control in the left and the right audiochannel.

5 The ”MONITORING” display refers to the two monitor output sockets MON-ITOR OUT L (left channel) and OUT R (right channel).

The left area of the window displays the signal source for the two audio moni-tor outputs.

Possible selections:

OFFMonitoring channel switched off.

CH 1, CH 2Audio output channel 1 or 2 selected.

BOTHBoth audio output channels selected.

The right area of the window shows the current level at the two audio monitoroutputs.

6 The studio level shown on this display is selected in window ”Audio LevelSetup” (section 4.9.1).

Level adjustment

Headphone

Monitoring

Studio level

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9



Not assigned

resol(ution) COARS or FINE Each time, this function key is pressed, the resolution of the audio level display isswitched over between high and low resolution.

FINE on the display of the function key shows that the indicating range of the audiolevel display covers 18 dB (high-resolution display).

COARS on the display of the function key shows that the indicating range of theaudio level display covers 48 dB.

channel select CH 1If the display field of this function key is light, this indicates that the output level ofaudio channel 1 can be changed with the adjust dial.

When the field is dark, the level of this audio channel is not influenced by a leveladjustment.

Each time the function key is pressed, the status is reversed.

channel select CH 2Same function as function key F3, but applies to audio channel 2.

not assigned

adjust HEADP.Adjustment of the headphone volume (output socket HEADPHONE, audio connec-tor panel, rack 1) in connection with the adjust dial. When adjusting, the levels ofboth audio channels are affected at the same time.

Not assigned

select channel LEFTSelection of the signal source for the left monitor output (socket MONITOROUT L).

Selection is made by pressing function key F8 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F8 (toggle mode).

select channel RIGHTSelection of the signal source for the right monitor output (socket MONITOR OUTR).

Selection is made by pressing function key F9 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F9 (toggle mode).

Function keys

Input leveladjustment

Resolution

Selectchannels &Output leveladjustment

Headphonelevel

F 10

F 11

F 12



levels LEFTAdjustment of the output level of the left audio monitor channel in connection withthe adjust dial.

levels RIGHTAdjustment of the output level of the right audio monitor channel in connection withthe adjust dial.

Note:

Unless the adjust dial is has been assigned another function by one of thefunction keys, it only serves to adjust the two monitor output levels.

SETUPOpens window ”Audio Level Setup” to adjust the scaling for the audio level display,the studio level and the balance (see section 4.9.1).

Output level

Setup



4.9.1 AUDIO LEVEL SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Window ”Audio Level Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in main menu”AUDIO LEVEL.”

This window serves to adjust the scaling for audio level display, studio level and theterminal condition.

The following settings are possible for the scaling of the audio level (position of the0dB mark opposite the 0VU mark).

fulls”Full scale”, the 0dB mark is at maximum, i.e. 20 dB above the 0VU mark.

peak 9The 0dB mark is 9 dB above the 0VU mark.

peak 8The 0dB mark is 8 dB above the 0VU mark.

VU (Volume Unit)The 0dB mark is 20 dB below the maximum, i.e. at the 0VU mark.

The studio level shows the output level in dBu which corresponds to a level of 0 VUin the Shadow Telecine.

It is possible to select studio levels of –3 dBu, 0 dBu, 4 dBu and 8 dBu.

Scaling

Studio level

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 12



scale REFSelection of the scaling for the audio level displays.Selection is made by pressing function key F4 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F4 (toggle mode).

studio LEVELSelection of the studio levelSelection is made by pressing function key F5 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F5 (toggle mode).

A1, A2, UNBALWith the studio levels of 4 dBu and 8 dBu, the output final stage has to be switchedto floating if the load is unbalanced. With this, the output level is reduced by 6 dB.

At –3 dBu and 0 dBu, the output is always floating.

monitor UNBALThis function key has the same function as F6, but applies to the monitor outputs.

dolby UNBALThis function key has the same function as F6, but applies to the dolby SR 1/2 out-puts.

EXITCloses window

or

window CLOSE

Function keysScaling

Studio level

Balance

Closes window

F 12

F 5

F 4

F 9

F 2

F 3

F 4

Standard values

Unity



4.9.2 OPERATING SEQUENCES

Example 1 – Setting levels of Audio 1 and 2 to –3 dBu

The studio level is –3 dBu and the 0dB marks on the audio level displays are to be9 dB above 0 VU, coarse resolution.

The input and output level adjustments of all audio channels are to be set to stan-dard value (unity).

Audio monitor outputs are not used.

Use as in the following example:

Adaptation to the relevant studio level.

Key sequence:

Select main menu

[SETUP] Open window

[studio LEVEL] Press and hold”–3 dBu” select with adjust dial, release F5

[scale REF] Press and hold”peak 9” select with adjust dial, release F4

[EXIT] Close window

[resol FINE] or[resol COARS] Select COARS

[channel select CH 1] Select audio channel CH 1


Press, release Unity

Studio level

Scaling

Select channels

Conditions

Possibleapplication

Audiolevel

F 12

F 5

F 7

F 4

F 9

F 2

F 2

F 3

F 4



Example 2 – Setting levels of Audio 1 and 2 to +8 dBu, Audio Mon CH 1 and CH 2

The studio level is +8 dBu and the 0dB marks on the audio level displays are to beat 0 VU, coarse resolution.

The output level adjustments of the two audio channels are to be set to standardvalue (unity).If the input level adjustments of the two audio channels are to be set to standardvalue, the data in the parentheses are applicable.

At the audio monitor outputs a balanced terminal condition is given. The two audiochannels CH 1 and 2 are fed to the audio monitor.

Use as in the following example:

Adjusting the reproduction monitoring

Key sequence:

Select main menu

[SETUP] Open window

[studio LEVEL] Press and hold”8 dBu” select with adjust dial, release F5

[monitor BALNC]selection (display field dark)

[scale REF] Press and hold”VU” select with adjust dial, release F4

[EXIT] Close window

[resol FINE] or[resol COARS] Select COARS

(with input level adjustment:)

[resol FINE] or[resol COARS] Select FINE



Studio level

Scaling

Channel selection

Conditions

Possibleapplication

Audiolevel

Unity

F 8

F 9



Press, release Unity

[select channel LEFT] Press and hold”CH 1” select with adjust dial, release F8

[select channel RIGHT] Press and hold”CH 2” select with adjust dial, release F9

Adjust Dial Adjust the monitor output levels accordingto personal volume impression

Standard values

Monitor

4.10 Audio Config Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.10 AUDIO CONFIG MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

87654321 9 10


Main menu ”Audio Config” is selected by pressing menu selection key ”Audio Con-fig” on the control panel.This main menu serves to set the configuration of the two audio channels. Thechannels 1 and 2 form a channel pair.

The current configuration of the channel pair is graphically displayed as a block diagram.

The Shadow Telecine has two digital audio channels which can be used at the out-put alternatively in an analog or digital form. The digital audio interface ”AES” corre-sponds to the AES/EBU standard.

AES/EBU audio data formatA block of the digital audio output signal consists of 192 audio frames.The audio frame consists of the subframes A and B with 32 bits each (1 audioframe = 20.83 µ s).

Overview

1 Audio signal source selection (Commag, Comopt, External 1/2, Test) Display of the audio signal source (symbolized input sockets)

2 Dolby noise reduction (dolby A, SR)

3 Lowpass filtering

Audio channel

Audio data format

Input side

Function keys

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

STE-B14.10 Audio Config Menu FCP


4 External or internal locking of the audio A/D converter

5 Pre-emphasis

6 Mono/stereo changeover

7 Display of audio delay

8 Test tone selection

9 D/A conversion

10 Display of the audio outputs (symbolized output sockets)2 analog outputs and 1 digital one (AES/EBU)

Setup to analog INPUTOpens the window for selecting the audio signal sources(see section 4.10.1 and section 4.10.6).

Not assigned

Setup analog DOLBYOpens the window for defining the dolby noise reduction(see section 4.10.2).

Setup analog LOW-PassOpens the window for switching on the analog lowpass filter(see section 4.10.3).

Not assigned

Setup digital REF.Opens the window for selecting the digital audio reference(see section 4.10.4).

Setup digital PREEMOpens the window for switching on the digital preemphasis(see section 4.10.5).

Setup digital MODEOpens the window for defining the audio channel mode mono/stereo(see section 4.10.6).

Setup digital DELAYOpens the window for defining the audio channel delay(see section 4.10.7).

Input side

Output side

Output side

F 10

F 11

F 12



Setup digital TESTOpens the window for selecting the digital audio test signals(see section 4.10.8).

Not assigned

Not assigned

The windows opened with the function keys F1 to F4 and F6 to F10 can be closedagain by pressing the function key once more. In addition, the window can beclosed with the assigned function key EXIT or function key F12 ”Window CLOSE”.

Close window



4.10.1 SETUP INPUT SOURCE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 465: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Input Source”

Window ”Setup Input Source” is opened by pressing key F1 ”setup analog INPUT”in main menu ”Audio Config”.

This window serves to define the audio signal sources for the displayed channelpair.

As signal sources for audio channel 1 and 2 can be selected:

CommagSelection of commag audio for 16mm films.If this field appears hatched, commag cannot be selected, i.e. there is no commagaudio for the currently used film format.

ComoptSelection comopt audio for 16mm and 35mm films.

External 1, 2Selection of an external audio source via socket EXTERNAL 1, 2 IN.

TESTInternally, digitally produced sine wave tone (1 kHz/10 kHz, 0 VU) for test purposes.

OFFOptional muting of an audio channel that is not needed.

Audio Scanner 1 - COMMAG 16 - can be released :

disableAudio Scanner 1 will be lifted up, audio will not be scanned

enableAudio Scanner 1 will be released, ready for operation

Note:

In case of STEREO signal sources: CH 1 = Left, CH 2 = Right

Commag audio

Comopt audio

External

Test tone

Muting

Lift upAudio Scanner 1

Release Audio Scanner 1

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10



press at hold CH 1 Selection of the audio signal source for channel 1 (Commag, Comopt, External 1,Test).Selection is made by pressing function key F4 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F4 (toggle mode).

Not assigned

press at hold CH 2Selection of the audio signal source for channel 2 (Comopt, External 2, Test).Selection is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F6 (toggle mode).

Not assigned

release CMAGServes to set the Audio Scanner 1, COMMAG 16 MONO

disableAudio Scanner 1 will be lifted up; audio will not be scanned.enableAudio Scanner 1 will be released, ready for operation.

Not assigned

EXITCloses the window

Function keys

Close window

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9



4.10.2 SETUP NOISE REDUCTION

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Window ”Setup Noise Reduction” is opened by pressing key F3 ”setup analogDOLBY” in main menu ”Audio Config”.

This window serves to define type and intensity of dolby noise reduction for bothaudio channels.

press and hold CH 1Selection of dolby noise reduction for audio channel 1. Selection is made by pressing function key F5 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F5 (toggle mode).

The following adjustments are possible:

Dolby ANot selectable!

Dolby SR (SR: Spectral Recording)Special noise reduction via an external add-on unit.

OFFNoise reduction switched off.

Not assigned

press and hold CH 2This function key has the same function as F5, but applies to audio channel 2.

Not assigned

adjust level CH 1Level adjustment for noise reduction in audio channel 1 is made by pressing thefunction key and turning the adjust dial.

Function keys

F 10

F 11

F 3



adjust level CH 2This function key has the same function as F9, but applies to audio channel 2.


or

Window selection

Close window

F 6

F 7

F 8



4.10.3 SETUP LOWPASS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 467: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Low Pass”

Window ”Setup Low Pass” is opened by pressing key F4 ”setup analog Low Pass”in main menu ”AUDIO CONFIG”.

This window serves to switch on or off lowpass filters in the respective audio chan-nel depending on the film sound .The two lowpass filters attenuate higher frequencies from 5 kHz.

press and hold CH 1Selection of the lowpass filter for audio channel 1.Selection is made by pressing function key F6 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F6 (toggle mode).


flat (standard setting)Film audio channel is not filtered.Use with good film sound quality.

5 kHzFilm audio channel is filtered. Use with bad film sound quality.

Not assigned

press and hold CH 2This function key has the same function as F6, but applies to audio channel 2.

Function keys

F 10

F 4

F 12




or

Window selection

or

Window CLOSE

Close window

F 8

F 9

F 10



4.10.4 SELECT REFERENCE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 468: Audio Config menu with window ”Select Reference”

Window ”Select Reference” is opened by pressing key F6 ”setup digital REF.” in main menu ”Audio Config”.

This window serves to internally or externally lock the audio A/D converter.

press and hold REF. Selection of the locking mode together for both audio channels.Selection is made by pressing function key F8 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F8 (toggle mode).


int VideoLocking internally. Locking of the audio A/D converters is made on the internal video signal (standardsetting).

ext 48 kHzLocking externally.Use when playing the film sound into an external digital audio studio which isclocked with 48 kHz.

Not assigned


Function keys

Close window

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 12



4.10.5 SETUP PREEMPHASIS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 469: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Preemphasis”

Window ”Setup Preemphasis” is opened by pressing key F7 ”setup digital Preem-phasis” in main menu ”Audio Config”.

This window serves to set the preemphasis for both audio input signals (preempha-sis: peaking of frequency components before A/D conversion, for improving thesignal-to-noise ratio).In the digital AES signal, only a preemphasis information is entered in the channelstatus.In the analog signal, the frequency response is equalized after D/A conversion inthe output stage.

Possible adjustments:

OFFNo preemphasis

ONSwitching on the CD-type preemphasis (EQ time constant: 50/15 µ s).

press and hold PREEMSelection of the preemphasis for audio channel 1 and 2.Selection is made by pressing function key F3 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F3 (toggle mode).

Not assigned

EXITCloses the windowor

Window CLOSE

Function keys

Close window



4.10.6 SELECT OUTPUT MODE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 470: Audio Config menu with window ”Select Output Mode”

Window ”Select Output mode” is opened by pressing key F8 ”setup digital MODE”in main menu ”AUDIO CONFIG”.

This window serves to define mono or stereo mode (two-Channel).


MONO

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


One channel operation(only subframe A in the digital signal used)

16mm films have always mono audio tracks. 35mm films may have mono or stereo audio tracks depending on the type.If a stereo film has to be played in mono mode, both channels are mixed with eachother, their levels automatically adapted and distributed to the two audio channels.

Mono mode should only be used with stereo signal sources selected (e.g. OPT1and OPT2 in case of 35mm stereo film or EXT1 and EXT2 in case of external stereodevices). With one input switched to OFF (not connected), mono mode is not appli-cable, i.e. channel routing changes to two-channel mode.

F 4

F 5

F 6



TWO CHANNEL (stereo)

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


2-channel operationwith following allocation of the channels.

Socket DIGITAL AES/EBU OUT Channel one Subframe AChannel two Subframe B

Socket ANALOG AUDIO 1 OUT Channel one(Left channel with stereo sources)

ANALOG AUDIO 2 OUT Channel two(Right channel with stereo sources)

If a mono film is played in the two--channel mode, the 2nd channel can be used forinstance with an external SEPMAG signal via ”External 1, 2” (see section 4.10.1).

press and hold MODESelection of the mode for both displayed audio channels together.Selection is made by pressing function key F4 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F4 (toggle mode).

Not assigned


Function keys

Close window

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6



4.10.7 SETUP CHANNEL DELAY

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 473: Audio Config menu with window ”Setup Channel Delay”

Window ”Setup Channel Delay” is opened by pressing key F9 ”setup digital DELAY” in main menu ”Audio Config”.

This window permits to advance or delay the position of the audio signal for beingmatched to the video signal, if this is required because of external delays.

The delay between video and audio signal on the different film formats is handledby the Shadow Telecine in the range from 18 to 31 fps automatically.

adjust CH 1Selection of the delay for audio channel 1.The display over ”adjust CH 1” shows the time in milliseconds by which the audiosignal is delayed in comparison with the video signal.

The adjustable delay area is within -60 ms and +1000 ms for 16mm and 35mm filmformats.

Adjustment is made by pressing function key F2 and turning the adjust dial to theleft or right in 10ms steps.

Not assigned

adjust CH 2This function key has the same function as F2, but applies to audio channel 2.

Not assigned


Function keys

Close window

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 10

F 12



4.10.8 SELECT TEST TONE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 474: Audio Config menu with window ”Select Test Tone”

Window ”Select Test Tone” is opened by pressing key F10 ”setup digital TEST” inmain menu ”Audio Config”.

This window permits to switch over the test tone from 1kHz (standard setting) to10 kHz.The test tone is switched on as described in section 4.10.1.

press and hold TESTSelection of the test tone for the audio channels.Selection is made by pressing function key F5 and turning the adjust dial or press-ing the cursor keys respectively, or shortly touching F5 (toggle mode).

Not assigned


or

Window selection

or

Window CLOSE

Function keys

Close window

4.11 Monitoring Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.11 MONITORING MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

7654321

Fig. 475: Monitoring menu

Main menu ”Monitoring” is selected by pressing key ”MONITORING” on the controlpanel.

This main menu serves to select the monitoring video signals for reproduction viadifferent oscilloscopes, vectorscopes and color monitors.An extensive test signal selection as well as a selective test point and channelselection enable fast localization for errors.

Overview

1 Signal source: analog signal processing

2 FPN store(FPN: Fixed Pattern Noise, pattern noise compensation in the white areas,rack 2)

3 Color correction with matching/gamma, gain/lift and masking stage (rack 2)

4 Spatial processor with sizing, matrix and contour correction (rack 3)

5 Standard and High Definition output interface with YCrCb/RGB matrix stageand D/A converter for the analog or digital outputs

6 Symbols for the digital, the analog (both rack 3) and the WFM output of theShadow Telecine (rack 2)

7 General information window; gives information about the monitoring setupsettings (see section 4.11.3).

F 1

F 2 F 3to

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

STE-B14.11 Monitoring Menu FCP



select PATT(ER)NOpens windows for selecting test signal sources.(see section 4.11.1)

testpoint << or >>Selection of test points in the monitoring signal path.After pressing the function key F2 or F3 a thick arrow appears in the monitoringmenu which shows the actual signal selection.Repeated pressing gives access to further test points.The monitoring signal is switched off when the arrow vanishes.

Following test points are selectable:Test point ”FPN Store” Test point ”matching/gamma stage of the color correction” Test point ”gain/lift stage of the color correction” Test point ”masking stage of the color correction” Test point ”spatial processor stage” (with sizing, matrix and contour correction)Test point ”YCrCb/RGB matrix stage”Test point ”digital lowpass output”

channel select R / CRSelection of red (or CR) channel for monitor, oscilloscope or vectorscope.Channel selection is made by pressing function key F4.

Switching-over to another channel is made by pressing the function keys F5 to F7.

channel select G / YThis function key has the same function as F4, but applies to the green (or Y) chan-nel.

channel select B / CBThis function key has the same function as F4, but applies to the blue (or CB) chan-nel.

channel select SUPSelection of RGB (or YCRCB) channels superimposed on the oscilloscope.

Switching-over to a single channel is made by pressing the function keys F4 to F6.

channel select PARAD(E)Selection of RGB (or YCRCB) channels sequential on the oscilloscope.

Switching-over to a single channel is made by pressing the function keys F4 to F6.

channel select VECT(OR)Switchover oscilloscope to vector display (only in YCRCB operation).

Function keys

F 10

F 11

F 12



display 1H (2H)Oscilloscope 1H / 2H display switchover for the function keys F4 to F7.

preset WFMopens window, see section 4.11.2.

SETUP opens window, see section 4.11.3.



4.11.1 SELECT TEST PATTERN

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

saw_14

M_Burst10%90%60%Are

Fig. 476: Monitoring menu with window ”Test Pattern Select”

Window ”Test Pattern Select” is selected by pressing function key F1 in the monitor-ing menu.

This window serves to select the test signals.

Selection of the individual test signals is made with function key F3 and the adjustdial or the cursor keys. The test signal is switched on or off with function key F4.

Pressing function key F5 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to mainmenu MONITORING.

Overview

The meanings of the individual test signals are explained below.

Test signal MeaningOFF switched offStair(case) staircaseSaw(tooth)_100 sawtooth 0 -100%Colbar color barSaw_14 Ramp 0 -14%

M-Burst Multiburst10% 10% video level, for monitor adjustment *90% 90% video level, for monitor adjustment *60%Are 60% video level (area)Black blackFPNPos positive FPN correction signalFPN Rd last stored FPN correction data

FPNNeg negative FPN correction signalFPNIM Intermediate FPN correction signalFPN Rd last stored FPN correction dataFPNPT Primetime FPN correction signal

F 5



* To achieve this video levels, set following parameters:Select CRT gamma with the function key F2 to “ON” (Section 4.6.1 Grading Setup)Select Film type with the function key F1 to “Print pos”. (Section 4.4 Film menu)Select Color correction with the function key F10 to “unity” (Section 4.6.1 GradingSetup)

EXITCloses the window ”Test Pattern Select”.Alternatively, press function key F12 ”window CLOSE”.

Close window

F 1

F 5

F 6



4.11.2 PRESET WFM

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 477: Monitoring-Menu with window ”Preset for WFM ...”

Window ”WFM preset” is selected by pressing function key F11 in the monitoringmenu.

This window serves to select the preset adjustments for the different oscilloscopes.

Pressing function key F10 stores the preset adjustments together with the presetadjustments on the oscilloscope.

Operating sequence for WFM preset adjustments:1. Select the WFM interfaces with F1–F42. Select preset adjustments with F6–F93. Set the additional adjustments on the local WFM, if necessary4. Store the preset adjustments with F10 STORE

Pressing function key F11 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to mainmenu MONITORING.


press to enable WFM-REMOTE- ...CTRL1–4 (WFM waveform monitor, oscilloscope/vectorscope)Selection of the WFM control 1–4 for the preset adjustments F6–F9.The WFM interfaces are located on the connection unit of rack 2 (Monitoring / RemCtrl 1–4).

Not assigned.

Note:The following function keys F6–F9 can be inactive dependent on the con-nected WFM type.

select setting for WFM-ctrl (1–4) PARAD(E)Fixed preset setting for sequential display of the channels on the oscilloscope.

Function keys

F 7 F 9+

F 8

F 10

F 11



select setting for WFM-ctrl (1–4) SUP2H / SUP1HFixed preset setting for superimposed display of the channels on the oscilloscope(2 channel lines or 1 channel line in sequence each).

select setting for WFM-ctrl (1–4) VECTO(R)Fixed preset setting for switching over the oscilloscope to vector display (only inYCRCB operation).

STOREStores the WFM preset adjustments F6–F9.

EXITCloses the window ”WFM preset”.Alternatively, press function key F12 ”window CLOSE”.



4.11.3 MONITORING SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 478: Monitoring menu with window ”Monitoring Setup”

Window ”Monitoring Setup” is selected by pressing function key F12 in the Monitor-ing menu.

This window serves to select various monitoring basic settings.

Selection of the individual setup adjustments is made with the adjust dial or the cur-sor keys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened win-dow is changed.Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F11 are used to change theswitching status.

Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window andreturns the user to main menu MONITORING.

Overview

The meanings and the possible selections are explained below. Factory adjustments are bold printed.

4.11.3.1 Monitoring Setup ”sequence”

Defines the display sequence of the monitoring signals on the oscilloscope.

Selection:

F 1 ”R G B”RGB (sequential or superimposed) display

F 2 ”G B R”GBR (sequential or superimposed) display



4.11.3.2 Monitoring Setup ”H-blanking”

Switches the horizontal blanking of the monitoring signals on or off.

Selection:

F 1 ”OFF”horizontal blanking switched off

F 2 ”ON”horizontal blanking switched on

4.11.3.3 Monitoring Setup ”clamp local”

Switches the clamping of the following monitoring signals on or off.Connection unit Rack 2:MONITORING / ANALOG OUT CH 1-R, CH2-G, CH 3-B

Selection:

F 1 ”OFF”clamping switched off

F 2 ”ON”clamping switched on

4.11.3.4 Monitoring Setup ”clamp remote”

Switches the clamping of the following monitoring signals on or off.Connection unit Rack 2:MONITORING / REM ANALOG OUT CH 1-R, CH2-G, CH 3-B

Selection:

F 1 ”OFF”clamping switched off

F 2 ”ON”clamping switched on



4.11.3.5 Monitoring Setup ”RemCtrl 1–2”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 479: Monitoring submenu “Monitoring Setup”

Defines the connected WFM type (for REM CTRL 1–2 on connection unit rack 2).

Selection: 300 / 300A / 5464 / 1730 / 1735

F 1 ”300”Tektronix WFM 300 / 1740 / 1750 / 1760 connected *

F 2 ”300A”Tektronix WFM 300 A connected

F 3 ”5464”Philips PT 5464 connected

F 4 ”1730”Tektronix 1730 HD connected

F 5 ”1735”Tektronix 1735 HD connected

F 6 “5664”Philips PT 5664 connected **

Fig. 480: Connection unit rack 2 (only monitoring part)

Important Notes!

* WFM TEK 1740 - 1760 Waveform monitor series TEK 1740 - 1760 has to be configured as WFM 300.Storing the presets via menu MONITORING F 11 preset WFM “Preset for WFM300” F 10 STORE is not supported. Use front control panel for storing presets.

Create a special control cable for WFM series TEK 1740 - 1760 as follows:

15-pin subminiatureD-connector, male

connected toShadow Rack 2

25-pin subminiatureD-connector, male

connected to TEK 1740 - 1760

Function

pin 9 pin 14 GND

pin 5 pin 18 Recall 2 Superimposed

pin 6 pin 19 Recall 3 Vector

pin 7 pin 17 Recall 1 Parade

** WFM Philips 5664Disconnect pin 1 from the control cable PM5664, otherwise the remote controlfunctions are disturbed.

RemoteControl 1

J 3

J 4

RemoteControl 2

Ch 1–R

Ch 2–G

Ch 3–B

S

J 10

J 13

Monitoring

J 11

J 12



4.11.3.6 Monitoring Setup ”master on”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 481: Monitoring submenu “Monitoring Setup”

Defines which waveform monitor is the master WFM.The master WFM can be operated always from the user interface of the monitoringmenu (function keys F4–F10).

Selection:

F 1 ”CTRL1” waveform monitor on REM CTRL 1* is master

F 2 ”CTRL2” waveform monitor on REM CTRL 2* is master

* on connection unit of rack 2

F 12 EXITCloses window ”Monitoring Setup”.

Close window

4.12 User Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.12 USER MENU

Only active when Data Output Interface FY 4345 is available in Rack3!

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

transmitting

4321

Fig. 482: User-Menu (HIPPI data channel)

Main menu ”User” is selected by pressing menu selection key ”User” on the controlpanel.

This main menu serves to set the parameters for data reproduction with the HIPPIdata channel (High Performance Parallel Interface).

Overview

1 HIPPI status display with following possible messages:”not connected” data channel not connected with external unit”connected” data channel connected with external unit”transmitting” data channel is transmitting”idle” data channel is ready”failure” failure occurred in the data channel

Display of the actual data rate in MByte/s.The actual data rate is calculated by the CSP (FY 6303.xx in Rack 3).

2 Numeric entry for the three displays over the function keys F4 to F6.The manual entry of values is done with the numeric keyboard of the func-tional control panel, take over is done by pressing the concerning functionkey.

3 Display of the film frame number.

4 Window of the actual setup adjustments of the data output.

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

STE-B14.12 User Menu FCP


transfer STARTStarts the data transfer in the HIPPI data channel (operates only in transfer mode”frame by frame”).

Note:In this moment the Shadow Telecine must be in the locked play operation (not dur-ing run-up time). LED ”Servo” on the Functional Control Panel is lit.

transfer STOPStops the data transfer in the HIPPI data channel (operates only in transfer mode”frame by frame”).

Note:In this moment the Shadow Telecine must also be in synchronal play operation (donot stop before).

termina(l) OPEN Opens a terminal window to check the data transfer.Each “!” represents one transferred film image.

route DSTDestination routingDestination takes the number entered with the numeric keypad and inserts the in-formation as logical destination into the HiPPI data stream.

Range of destination: 0 ... 255

This information will only be used if the Shadow Telecine is used together with aHiPPI switch.

Note:The switch has to be programmed with the installed physical destination ad-dresses, in order to pass the data stream to the desired logical destination.(e.g. set destination logical address 1 to physical address 1)

A physical address can be the slot number or connector number of the HiPPIswitch.

image size PIXDefines the horizontal image size of the data output in pixels per line.With upper display for the actual pixel number.

The functions of the manual entry, take over and display of the pixel number forfunction key F5 are the same as for function key F4.

Note:When pressing function keys F7 to F9 the two display fields over the functionkeys F5 and F6 show the fixed values for SDTV and HDTV image size in pixelsand lines.

image size LINESDefines the vertical image size of the data output in lines per image.With upper display for the actual line number.

The functions of the manual entry, take over and display of the lines number forfunction key F6 are the same as for function key F4.

Function keys

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 11

F 12



Note:When pressing function keys F7 to F9 the two display fields over the functionkeys F5 and F6 show the fixed values for SDTV and HDTV image size in pixelsand lines.

fixed dimensions SDTV 4 : 3Defines the horizontal and vertical image size for SDTV 4:3 at the data output.

Image size ratio: 720 pixels x 540 linesThe pixel and line number is shown in the display fields over the function keys F5and F6.

fixed dimensions SDTV 16 : 9Defines the horizontal and vertical image size for SDTV 16:9 at the data output.


fixed dimensions HDTV 16 : 9Defines the horizontal and vertical image size for HDTV 16:9 at the data output.


not connected

mode DATASwitches the Shadow Telecine to data mode.

Data mode:

SDTV and HDTV outputs are switched off.

In the Setup menu ”Data Mode” is displayed.

The actual video standard is invalid.

Note:With DATA mode ”OFF” (F11) the setup menu ”Setup TV Standard” appearsautomatically for switching back again the ”Data Mode” to the wished TVstandard.

SETUPOpens window, see section 4.12.1 Setup Data Output.



4.12.1 SETUP DATA OUTPUT

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

transmitting

Fig. 483: Window ”Data Output Setup”

Window ”Data Output Setup” is opened by pressing key F12 ”SETUP” in mainmenu ”User”.

This window serves to configure the data packing mode, the data conversion, theconnecting mode, the image file format, the color sequence and the transfer mode.

Selection of the individual parameters is made with digipot ”adjust dial” or the cur-sor keys of the functional control panel.Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F8 are used to change andstore the switching status.

Pressing function key F9 (EXIT) closes window and returns the user to main win-dow User.

Overview


F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6



4.12.1.1 Data Output Setup ”packing mode”

Puts data words of diverse video components together to data sequences to trans-mit them with a certain data rate in the HIPPI data channel.

Selection:3x8+K, 3x10 bit, 4x16 bit, 3xY-only(10bit), 2xY-only(16bit), 3xK-only(10bit)

”3 x 8+K”3 component data words and a key data word with 8 bit resolution each are put to-gether to a 32 bit data word (e.g.: R, G, B, K).

”3x10 bit”3 component data words with 10 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit dataword (e.g.: R, G, B).

”4 x 16 bit”3 component data words and a key data word with 16 bit resolution each are puttogether to two 32 bit data words (e.g.: R, G, B, K).

”3xY–only(10bit)” 3 luminance data words with 10 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit dataword (e.g.: Y1, Y2, Y3).

”2xY–only(16bit)”2 luminance data words with 16 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit dataword (e.g.: Y1, Y2).

”3xK–only(10bit)”3 key data words with 10 bit resolution each are put together to a 32 bit data word(e.g.: K1, K2, K3).

F 1

F 2

F 3



4.12.1.2 Data Output Setup ”data conversion”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

transmitting8 9 5 6 5

Fig. 484: User submenu “Data Output Setup”

With these settings the image data can be mapped to level ranges witch are re-quired by different applications.

Selection: standard TVLEV / GRLEV / DXR / TV_PD / LOG Genesis DXR-G / TV-G /C-PD

”TVLEV”Image data maintains the TV video levels:black level 64d (10 bit)white level 940d (10 bit)within a total range of 0 - 1023d (10 bit)

Note!The CRT gamma is normally switched on - Menu Grading - Grading Setup -but may be switched off for pure linear video signals.

”GRLEV”Image data is mapped to graphic video levels:black level 0dwhite level 1023d (10 bit)within a total range of 0 - 1023d (10 bit)

Note:

The CRT gamma is normally switched on - Menu Grading - Grading Setup -but may be switched off for pure linear video signals.

”DXR”Printing density characteristic for CINEON DXR (Digital Extended Range) files - e. g. used for post production systems like Inferno / Fire (Discreet Logic) or Dom-ino (Quantel) - which captures the dynamic range of NEG films.

OCN Film materialFor an One-Light transfer of OCN (Original Color Negative) material, the followingsettings are recommended:

(STE-B1 Functional Control Panel CP1)



� Set film type to “color NEG”Menu Film - F12 Setup - F8 color NEG

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 485: Menu Film

� Set primary color correction to “unity “. (e.g. menu Grading)

Attention!If “unity ALL” is used, the contour correction is also set to unity.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 486: Menu Grading

� Adjust the minimum density (frame bar) of the NEG film to � 100%.Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN,Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 487: Menu Monitoring

Set Black



Then select F7 - illumination ADJUST from the film menu.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

90%

40%

Fig. 488: Menu Film

Adjust illumination until the signal level on the waveform monitor does not exceed100 %. Use the “digipot adjust dial” for adjustment. If the peak signal values differ very much, film mode “Intermediate NEG” may givea better match.

� Set the testpoint selector to testpoint “Film Color Correction - matchinggamma”.Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


� As a starting point, set “Matching black” controls in all three channels to 0.9(90%)and matching white with “Matching Gain” controls to 0.4 (40%).Select menu Film - F4 to F6 and adjust with the “digipot adjust dial”, see figure488.



� Adjust peak white (maximum density) of the channel with the highest whitelevel to 100% (just below clipping) with “Matching gain” controls. Select menu Film - F4 to F6 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, see figure488.

If the black level (Dmin) in the channel with the highest white level is clipped,then readjust “Matching Black” of this channel until it is unclipped and set“Matching Black” of the two other channels to the same control values.

Remark!The following “Matching Gain” control values can be taken as reference:~0.4 (40%) for a film density of ~1.6 above Dmin (B-channel)~0.3 (30%) for a film density of ~1.8 above Dmin (B-channel)

� Adjust Dmin (minimum density, e. g. frame bar) of the two channels with lowerlevels by means of the “Matching Gain” controls to the same black signallevel of the channel with the highest peak white level.Select menu Film - F4 and F5 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, see figure488.This ensure that Dmin is neutral independent of slight differences in the filmstock. At the Genesis scanner this is done by entering Dmin values for R, Gand B.The film data represents now print densities with neutral blacks and differentpeak white values in R,G and B, which reflect the gamma differences of the filmdyes.

Note!

a. In DXR mode, the CRT gamma (Menu Grading - F12 Grading Setup) is notselectable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the DXR transfer charac-teristic.

b. Image monitoring requires a calibrated graphics display monitor.

PRINTFilm material

The Kodak DXR technology is intended to represent the dynamic range of the origi-nal negative. Print material is normally color timed and has therefore lost its relationto the original negative. If scanning of this material compatible to DXR mode,please use “TV_PD” data conversion.

The “TV_PD” One-Light transfer adjustment in this case is:

� Adjust peak white of the PRINT film to approx. 100% signal level with illumina-tion.Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN,Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

� Adjust reference black with “Matching black” R G B to 0.5 (50%).

� Adjust reference white with “Matching gain” R G B to 0.5 (50%).

Set White

F 4

F 5



”TV_PD”Images, color graded on a TV monitor, are mapped to Printing Density characteris-tic for CINEON DXR files - e. g. used for post production systems like Inferno / Fire(Discreet Logic) or Domino (Quantel).

Note:In mode “TV_PD”, the CRT gamma is not switchable, because CRT gammais replaced by the TV_PD transfer characteristic. (Menu Grading - GradingSetup)

”LOG”“LOG” characteristic for CINEON DXR files.As a starting point for subsequent color grading, the following settings are recom-mended for this mode:

� Set primary color correction to “unity”


F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


� Adjust the minimum density Dmin (= film base density, e.g.: frame bar) of the

NEG film to �100%.

Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN,Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


F 6



Then select F7 “illumination ADJUST” from the menu film

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 492: Menu Film

Adjust illumination until the signal level on the wave form monitor does not exceed100 %. Use the CP1 “digipot adjust dial” for adjustment.

Therefore set now the testpoint selector to testpoint “match gamma”,Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


� Adjust reference black with “Matching black” R G B on the waveform monitorto 2% signal level.Select menu Film - F1 to F3 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, figure 492.

� Adjust reference white with “Matching gain” R G B on the waveform monitorto 40% signal level.Select menu Film - F4 to F6 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, figure 492.

Note!

a. In LOG mode, the CRT gamma (Menu Grading - F12 Grading Setup) is notselectable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the LOG transfer charac-teristic.

b. For improved dynamic range in black, the usage of DXR or TV_PD dataconversion is recommended.

”DXR-G”Printing density characteristic for CINEON DXR files, which captures the dynamicrange of NEG films.In addition to the DXR mode, the DXR-G mode provides a closer color matchingto the Kodak Genesis scanner.



OCN Film materialFor an One-Light transfer of OCN (Original Color Negative) film material, the fol-lowing settings are recommended:

(STE-B1 Functional Control Panel CP1)

� Set film type to “color NEG”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 494: Menu Film

� Set primary color correction to “unity “.


F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12




� Adjust the minimum density (Dmin = film base density, e.g. frame bar) of theNEG film to 100%.Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN,Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Then select F7 - illumination ADJUST from the film menu.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

90%

Fig. 497: Menu Film

Adjust illumination until the signal level on the wave form monitor does not exceed100 %. Use the “digipot adjust dial” for adjustment. If the peak signal values differ very much, film mode “Intermediate NEG” may givea better match.

� Set the testpoint selector to testpoint “Film Color Correction - matchinggamma”.Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Set Black



� As a starting point, set “Matching black” controls in all three channels to 0.9(90%)and matching white controls to 0.4 (40%).Select menu Film - F1 to F3 and adjust with the “digipot adjust dial”, see figure497.

� Adjust peak white (maximum density) of the channel with the highest whitelevel to 100% (just below clipping) with “Matching gain” controls. Select menu Film - F4 to F6 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, see figure497.

If the black level (Dmin) in the channel with the highest white level is clipped,then readjust “Matching Black” of this channel until it is unclipped and set“Matching Black” of the two other channels to the same control values.

Remark!The following “Matching Gain” control values can be taken as reference:~0.4 (40%) for a film density of ~1.6 above Dmin (B-channel)~0.3 (30%) for a film density of ~1.8 above Dmin (B-channel)

� Adjust Dmin (minimum density, e. g. frame bar) of the two channels with lowerlevels by means of the “Matching Gain” controls to the same black signallevel of the channel with the highest peak white level.Select menu Film - F4 and F5 and adjust with the digipot adjust dial, see figure497.This ensure that Dmin is neutral independent of slight differences in the filmstock. At the Genesis scanner this is done by entering Dmin values for R, G andB.The film data represents now print densities with neutral blacks and differentpeak white values in R,G and B, which reflect the gamma differences of the filmdyes.

Note!

a. In DXR-G mode, the CRT gamma (Menu Grading - F12 Grading Setup) isnot selectable, because CRT gamma is replaced by the DXR-G transfercharacteristic.

b. Image monitoring requires a calibrated graphics display monitor.

Set White

F 7

F 8



PRINTFilm materialThe Kodak DXR technology is intended to represent the dynamic range of the origi-nal negative. Print material is normally color timed and has therefore lost its relationto the original negative.For scanning of Print material compatible to DXR mode, please use “TV_G” dataconversion.

The TV-G One-Light transfer adjustment in this case is:

� Adjust peak white of the PRINT film to approx. 100% signal level with illumina-tion. Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN, Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

� Set reference black with “Matching black” R G B to 0.5 (50%).

� Set reference white with “Matching gain” R G B to 0.5 (50%).

”TV-G”Images, color graded on a TV monitor, are mapped to Printing Density characteris-tic for CINEON DXR files.

In addition to the TV_PD mode, the TV-G mode provides a closer color matchingto the Kodak Genesis scanner.

Note!In mode “TV-G”, the CRT gamma is not switchable, because CRT gamma isreplaced by the TV-G transfer characteristic. (Menu Grading -Grading Setup)

”C-PD” Cineon Print DensityThis logarithmic characteristic is close to the ideal Cineon print density characteris-tic. The density range is from 0 to 2.0.

In addition to the TV_PD mode, the TV-G mode provides a closer color matchingto the Kodak Genesis scanner.

Note!In mode “C-PD”, the CRT gamma is not selectable, because CRT gamma isreplaced by the C-PD transfer characteristic. (Menu Grading -Grading Setup)



Matching in “C-PD” data conversion mode

Optical matching of a scanned image must be done by usinga waveform monitor connected to STE-B1. C-PD matching viaSDTV or HDTV output is not possible.

The figure below shows a typical data transfer application with“C–PD” data conversion mode.

Waveform Monitor

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

Graphic Display

Data

HiPPI

PhantomTransfer Engine

CineonFilm Postproduction

C-PD Characteristic

Density

The following STE-B1 matching is recommended to usethe C-PD data conversions mode.

� Connect a waveform monitor to the monitoring outputs ofShadow - Rack 2

SubminiatureD-Connector15-pin

Rack 2

Monitoring

Waveform Monitor

STE-B1 Connection Unit Rack 2

CH1-R

CH2-G

CH3-B

S

Remote Control 1



� Set film type (xxx NEG) - Menu Film F12 film SETUP

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 499: Menu Film

� Set primary color correction to “unity “.


F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


� Adjust the light level for the lowest density (Dmin = film basedensity, e.g. frame bar) of the NEG film to 100% of the largestchannel.Therefore set first the testpoint selector to testpoint FPN,Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Set Film Type

Set Unity

AdjustIllumination



� Then select F7 - illumination ADJUST from the film menu.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

90%

Fig. 502: Menu Film

� Adjust illumination until the signal level on the waveform moni-tor does not exceed 100 %. Use the “digipot adjust dial” for ad-justment.

� Set the testpoint selector to testpoint “Film Color Correction -matching gamma”.Menu Monitoring - F2 / F3.

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


� Match the lowest neutral density (Dmin) of the used film ormatch with the appropriate Dmin (unexposed) film from the Te-lecine Tool Kit to the neutral dark level, using “matching black”controls (menu Film) for all three channels.

� Match the highest neutral density of the used film to 100%(maximum 110%) signal level on the waveform monitor, using“matching gain” controls (menu Film).

“Matching black” and “matching gain” adjustments influenceeach other. Therefore repeat “matching black” and “matchingwhite” adjustments until levels are consistent.

Note!A detailed application note for the usage of this new “C-PD”data conversions mode is in preparation and will be availableas a supplement.

Set Black

Set White



Application Settings Characteristic Workstation Requirements Comment

Function Black White

CRT DATA (10bit) (10bit)

Grading on a TVMonitor

0 TV => DATA => TV

ON TVLEV TV-Gamma

64d 940d no import or export LUTs !display gamma = 1 (or finetuned)

transparent => black andwhite unclipped

ON GRLEV TV-Gamma

0d 1023d TV export LUTdisplay gamma = 1 (or finetuned)

black and white clipped

TV => DATA =>FILM ON TVLEV TV-Gamma

64d 940d import LUT to 0...1023 and>10 bit lineardisplay gamma to be applied

Workstation clips black andwhite

ON GRLEV TV-Gamma

0d 1023d import LUT to >10 bit lineardisplay gamma to be applied

black and white clipped

- TV_PD PrintDensity

~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon or Cineon import LUT Cineon Printing Densitiesfor e.g. Inferno, Fire, Domino,

- TV-G GenesisPD

~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon system Cineon Printing Densities for Genesis emulation

Grading on a cali-brated Graphics

Display

- DXR PrintDensity

~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon import LUT Cineon Printing Densitiesfor e.g. Inferno, Fire, Domino;

FILM=>DATA=>FILM One-Light OCN transfer with

- illumination: signal level�100%

- matching Black control /RGB = 0.9 (90%) *

- matching Gain control /RGB = 0.4 (40%) *

- primary color correction =UNITY

- C-PD CineonPrint D.

~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon import LUT Cineon Printing Densities

- illumination signal level�100%

- matching Black & Gain byusing a waveform monitor

- DXR-G GenesisPD

~ 95d ~ 685d Cineon system Cineon Printing Densities forGenesis emulation

One-Light OCN transfer with

- illumination: signal level=100%

- matching Black control /RGB = 0.9 (90%) *

- matching Gain controlRGB = 0.4 (40%) *

-primary color correction =UNITY

OFF LOG logarith-mic

~ 95d ~ 685d special display LUT or importLUT

Cineonadditional markers on theWFM for the black and whitereference required

DATA, 8...10 bit linear OFF GRLEV linear 0d 1023d display gamma to be applied black and white clipped

Look-up tables (LUT) for data applications

* = Reference values. For fine adjustment, see description above “data conversion DXR or DXR_G”



4.12.1.3 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for TV

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

TV Monitor

TVLEV Characteristic

TV Monitor

TV Monitor

GRLEV Characteristic

0*

1023**

64*

940**

HiPPI

64*

940**


HiPPI


TV Monitor

RGB

RGB

** White reference level : decimal value of a 10 bit system* Black reference level : decimal value of a 10 bit system

Fig. 504: Data conversion

STE-B1 4.12 User Menu FCP


4.12.1.4 Function of Look-up Tables for Data Applications / Data for Film

Fig. 505: Dataconversion / * Black reference level : decimal value of a 10 bit system ** White reference level: decimalvalue of a 10 bit system

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

WINDWINDB A BA

STE -B1

TV–Monitor

TV–Monitor TV–Monitor

TV–Monitor

Graphic DisplayGraphic Display

Import

LUT

0*

1023**

95*

685**

95*

685**

76...95*

685...859**

76...95*

685...859**

HiPPI



64*

940**

Import

LUTHiPPI

HiPPI

PhantomTransfer Engine Phantom

Transfer Engine

Import

LUT

HiPPI


RGB

RGBRGB

RGB


DXR_G Characteristic

TV_PD Characteristic Ch

TVLEV Characteristic GRLEV Characteristic

TV_G Characteristic

DXR Characteristice.g.: Inferno, Domino ...

Image Processor

e.g.: Inferno, Domino ...Image Processor


Import

LUT


HiPPI

HiPPI



4.12 User Menu FCP STE-B1


F 1

F 2



4.12.1.5 Data Output Setup ”connection mode”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12



Defines the HIPPI operation mode.

Selection: STREA / DATAG

”stream”Stream operation:HIPPI data connection is established,images are transferred,connection is released only if errors occur or when the data mode is switched off.Note: that operation mode is not supported by all external HIPPI adapters.

”datagram”Datagram operation:HIPPI data connection will be established for each image,image will be transferred,connection will be released again.Note: that operation mode is supported by most of the external HIPPI adapters.

F 1

F 2



4.12.1.6 Data Output Setup ”image file format”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12



Defines the image file format. Each image is a separate file.

Selection: DPX / TIFF

”DPX”DPX format * (Digital moving Picture exchange format)

”TIFF”TIFF format *

Note!The Tag Image File Format (TIFF ) can only be used together with 3x8+K or3x16+K packing mode.All other packing modes generated files are not according to the TIFF stan-dard.

* Further details (restrictions and so on), see Planning and Installation, section In-terfaces.

F 1

F 2



4.12.1.7 Data Output Setup ”color sequence”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12



Defines the sequence of the digital video components in the 32 bit HIPPI word.

Selection: RGB / GBR

”RGB”sequence: R, G, B

”GBR”sequence: G, B, R

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 9



4.12.1.8 Data Output Setup ”transfer mode”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12



Defines the transfer mode.

Selection: OFF / FRAME / DISPL / CONTI

”OFF”No data transfer.

”frame by frame”Only during PLAY the data transfer begins by pressing F1 transfer START andends by pressing F2 transfer STOP. Scanned images are transferred proportionallyto the film speed. Each frame is transferred only once. The transmission is interrupted by STOP, ifthe external receiver is not fast enough. This mode ensures that no image is miss-ing in the transferred sequence.Application: transferring and storing of complete sequences.

”display changed”Data is transferred only if the film frame number or the image contents haschanged.The transmission skips images, if the external receiver is not fast enough.Works in all operating modes (shuttle, step and so on).Application: preview purposes

”continuous”Continuous data transfer, independent of the film run status (test mode).

EXITCloses window ”Data Output Setup”.

Close window

4.13 Setup Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.13 SETUP MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

21

Fig. 510: Setup menu

This menu is selected by pressing the menu selection key ”SETUP” on the controlpanel.

This menu serves to set basic machine parameters.

� Global resetting of the setting values to standard values

� Configuration of film deck, video, genlock, TV standard, control panel

� Setting of date and time

� Selecting the remote interface for the telecine

Overview

1 Display of current date and time

2 Display of TV standard. Shows the selected TV standard (or ”Data mode”).

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 11

F 12

STE-B14.13 Setup Menu FCP


unity GLOBGlobal resetting of the setting values in the Film-, Grading and Sizing menu to stan-dard values.

Not assigned

Not connected

setup STDRDOpens window, see section 4.13.1 Setup TV standard.

setup FILMDOpens window, see section 4.13.2 Setup Filmdeck.

setup VIDEOOpens separate submenu, see section 4.13.3 Setup Video.

setup GENLKOpens separate submenu, see section 4.13.4 Setup Genlock.

Not assigned

setup PANELOpens separate submenu, see section 4.13.5 Setup Panel.

set TIMEOpens window, see section 4.13.6 Setup menu “Set Data and Time”.

set REMIFOpens window, see section 4.13.7 Setup remote.

Not assigned.

Function keys

F 3

F 5



4.13.1 SETUP TV STANDARD

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 511: Window ”Setup TV Standard”

Setup window ”Setup TV Standard” is opened by pressing key F4 ”setup STDRD”in main menu ”SETUP”.

This window serves to select the different TV standards.

Depending on the assignment, the function keys F3, F5 and F7 are used to changethe different standards.Data mode can be selected with F9. But is only available if the option FY 4345 DataOutput Interface exists.

Pressing function key F11 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window andreturns the user to main menu SETUP.

The following TV standards can be selected:

select SDTV 525_SDTV SDTV standard with 525 lines / 60 Hz 625_SDTV SDTV standard with 625 lines / 50 Hz525_EDTV EDTV standard with 525 lines / 60 Hz 625_EDTV EDTV standard with 625 lines / 50 Hz525_8:4:4 8:4:4 standard with 525 lines / 60 Hz 625_8:4:4 8:4:4 standard with 625 lines / 50 Hz

select HDTV1250_50 HDTV standard with 1152 active lines / 50 Hz *1125_60 HDTV standard with 1035 active lines / 60 Hz *1125_59 HDTV standard with 1035 active lines / 59.94 Hz *1080_60 HDTV standard with 1080 active lines / 60 Hz *1080_59 HDTV standard with 1080 active lines / 59.94 Hz *720_60 HDTV standard with 720 active lines / 60 Hz **720_59 HDTV standard with 720 active lines / 59.94 Hz **

Function keys

F 7

F 9

F 10

F 11



select DTV1080_24 P DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 24 Hz **1080_25 P DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 25 Hz **1080_23.9 P DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 23.9 Hz **1080_24 SF DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 24 Hz **1080_50 I DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 50 Hz **1080_23.9 SF DTV standard with 1080 active lines / 23.9 Hz **

* = Option FH 4069 HDTV Output is required ** = Options FH 4069 HDTV Output and FH 4066 Digital TV Option 1280x720/60P are required

data mode 50HzThe Shadow is switched to “data mode” and sends out images via the Data OutputInterface (HiPPI serial)

All sync outputs and the timecode are set to video mode 1250/50/2:1

� Timecode is generated in 50 Hz mode (25 frames/s)

� Available fixed speeds are 6.25; 12.5, 18.66, 25, 50;

� Genlock generator is switched to 1250/50

� SDTV Sync Out provides a 625/50 sync signal

data mode 59.9HzSelects data mode 59.9Hz, if the option FY 4345 Data Output Interface is available.

The Shadow is switched to “data mode” and sends out images via the Data OutputInterface (HiPPI serial)

All sync outputs and the timecode are set to video mode 1125/59.94/2:1

� Timecode is generated in 60 Hz mode (24 frames/s)

� Available fixed speeds are 6; 12, 24, 30, 48;

� Genlock generator is switched to 1125/60

� SDTV Sync Out provides a 525/59,94 sync signal

EXIT



Note!

In data mode operation

The Shadow Telecine can be switched over to data mode operation with func-tion key F11 ”mode DATA” in the user menu.

The actual video standard (adjusted in – menu Setup / display Setup TV Stan-

dard – with F3, F5 and F7) is invalid. The display 2 in the main menu setupshows ”Data Mode”, see fig. 510.

Besides, the SDTV, HDTV and DTV outputs are switched off.

The TV mode can only switched back to the video standard here in the setupwindow.

F 1 F 5to



4.13.2 SETUP FILMDECK

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 512: Setup submenu ”Filmdeck Settings”

Setup submenu ”Filmdeck Settings” is opened by pressing key F5 ”setup FILMD”in main menu ”SETUP”.This submenu serves to perform filmdeck basic adjustments.The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor controlkeys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened windowis changed.Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F9 are used to change theswitching states.Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) stores the new selection, closes the window andreturns the user to main menu SETUP.

Overview


4.13.2.1 Filmdeck setting “core diameter left / right”

Adjustment of the used bobbin or film reel diameters (separately for the left andright reel spindle).

Important for determining the correct film supply indication and for the function”auto stop” (see chapter 4.13.2.2).

Selection:

50MM / 75MM / 100MM / 127MM / 150MM(Thomson recommends to use no 50mm bobbins).

F 1

F 2

F 3



4.13.2.2 Filmdeck setting “auto stop”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 513: Setup submenu “Filmdeck Settings”

Determines automatic filmdeck stop shortly before film end.

Attention: adjust always the correct ”core diameter” (see previous chapter)!

Selection:

”NEVER”automatic filmdeck stop switched off

”SHUTT”automatic filmdeck stop only in shuttle mode

”SH+PL”automatic filmdeck stop in shuttle and play modes

F 1 F 5to



4.13.2.3 Filmdeck setting “perforation”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


For perf selection in dependence on the film to be played.The number of perforation holes per film frame determines the value to be set.

Selection:

2PERF / 3PERF / 4PERF / 6PERF / 8PERF

Note concerning 6/8 perf mode!6/8 perf mode requires the options FH 1639 Vistavision and FH 4067 Rotation.

The vertical position of the 8 perf image requires a 90o rotation of thescanned image for the correct reproduction at the video outputs.

The selectable 6 / 8 perf standards are:

� Vistavision1 8 perf 35mm film standard

� Cinerama1 6 perf 35mm film standard

6/8 perf mode operates in SDTV, (H)DTV2 and Data3 mode. The images arescanned in horizontal direction with approx. 1500 lines, the vertical resolution isbased on1920 pixels.

� Film speed restrictionsThe maximum film speed for 6/8 perf mode is 30 fps fixed speed or 31.000 fpsin SAS.

� ACA LGAThe ACA Lens Gate Assembly is not supported in the 6/8 perf mode

� ACA EmulationThe ACA emulation is not supported in the 6/8 perf mode.

� MarkersMarkers are not supported in 6/8-perf mode.

� FramingFraming shifts the image horizontally.

900 Rotation

Vistavision&Cinerama

TV StandardsH & VResolution

Restrictions

F 1

F 2



� ResolutionThe (H)DTV resolution in horizontal direction is limited to approx. 1500 linesdue to the 90o rotated image scanning.

� Editing OperationThe ballistic of the servo system in the filmdeck is changed for 6/8 perf mode.That means editing operation with the default telecine controller parameter isnot accurate. (Pre-roll, stop etc.)Please find out the new 6/8 perf setup parameter by testing the editing func-tions of your telecine controller in 6/8 perf mode.Use alternatively he “default setup” or the “6/8 perf setup” parameters depend-ing of the 2-4 perf or 6/8 perf mode. (run-up time has been changed to approx. factor 2)

� Perforation selection lockedSelecting of 2, 3, 4, 6 and 8 perf film scanning is only possible in STOP mode.Changing of perf selections - performed by the Functional Control Panel or tele-cine controllers - during PLAY, Shuttle, JOG etc. will be ignored.

1 Trademarks! All brands and product names are trademarks of their respective companies!

2 Requires Option DTV

3 Requires Option Phantom Transfer Engine TE 4101

4.13.2.4 Filmdeck setting ”auto rescan”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Automatic read-in of the changed frame into the frame store.(after focus, illumination, 6 dB gain, film type changes etc.)

Selection:

”OFF””auto rescan” switched off

”ON””auto rescan” switched on

F 1

F 2



4.13.2.5 Filmdeck setting ”scan standard mode”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


The default value of this parameter is VAR. The value FIXED is used if the Shadow operates in combination with a colorprocessor “Pandora MegaDef”. In this case it is necessary the numbers of scannedlines are constant in both (50 Hz / 60 Hz) video and data modes.

Selection:

“VAR”Default setting for a Shadow without Pandora MegaDef.

“FIXED”Scan is done in a defined fixed format for Pandora MegaDef.

F 1 F 9to

F 1 F 9to



4.13.2.6 Filmdeck setting ”maximum shuttle speed 35mm”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Determines the maximum shuttle speed for 35mm films.

Selection:

2 to 10 times the normal speed

4.13.2.7 Filmdeck setting ”maximum shuttle speed 16mm”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Determines the maximum shuttle speed for 16mm films.

Selection:

2 to 25 times the normal speed

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 1

F 2

F 3



4.13.2.8 Filmdeck setting ”SepMag coupling”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Defines the sepmag coupling of external sepmag units (via connection SEPMAG OUT / Rack 2).

Selection:

”2*BP” (BP: Bi-phase Pulses)Sepmag synch pulses: 2*BiPh-(48/50 Hz)

”10*BP”Sepmag synch pulses: 10*BiPh-(240/250 Hz)

”1*BP”Sepmag synch pulses: 1*BiPh-(24/25 Hz)

4.13.2.9 Filmdeck setting ”TCgen Out coupling”

Defines the time code coupling of external time code units (via connection TC GEN OUT / Rack 2).

Selection:

”2*BP” (BP: Bi-phase Pulses)Time code synch pulses: 2*BiPh-(48/50 Hz)

”10*BP”Time code synch pulses: 10*BiPh-(240/250 Hz)

”1*BP”Time code synch pulses: 1*BiPh-(24/25 Hz)

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 1

F 2 F 6to



4.13.2.10Filmdeck setting ”Editor Out coupling”

Defines the editor coupling of external editor units (via connection EDITOR OUT / Rack 2).

Selection:

”2*BP” (BP: Bi-phase Pulses)Editor synch pulses: 2*BiPh-(48/50 Hz)

”10*BP”Editor synch pulses: 10*BiPh-(240/250 Hz)

”1*BP”Editor synch pulses: 1*BiPh-(24/25 Hz)

4.13.2.11 Filmdeck setting ”Lamp Shutdown delay”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Lamp Shutdown switches off the lamp after a selectable time out.

Selection:

”OFF” Lamp shutdown is switched off.

”10 S - 120 S”The lamp will be switched of after the selected time if the film transport stands still.The lamp will be automatically switched on whenever a new film transport com-mand will be executed. Also a STOP command will switch on the lamp.Each command will preset the timeout to the selected time.In stand-by mode the lamp will be switched off always.

F 12



Notes:

� If the lamp is switched off the optical system cools down.After switching on the lamp it can take minutes to warm up the systemto a stable characteristic (see chapter “Power-On” in the Manual ”Plan-ning and Installation”).

� If the lamp is switch on because of a new film transport command, someframes will be scanned with a low light level.

� The life time of the lamp will go down if it will be switched often.

EXITCloses setup submenu ”Filmdeck Settings”.

Close window

F 1

F 2

F 3



4.13.3 SETUP VIDEO

Note! Menu only effective when HDTV option FH 4069 is available!

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 521: Setup submenu ”Setup Video”

Setup submenu ”Setup Video” is opened by pressing key F6 ”setup VIDEO” in mainmenu ”SETUP”.

This submenu serves to perform video basic adjustments separately for SDTV andHDTV outputs.The possible selections for the SDTV and HDTV outputs are nearly the same.

The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor controlkeys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened windowis changed.Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F5 are used to change theswitching status.Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to mainmenu SETUP.

Overview


4.13.3.1 Setup Video ”H/V-blanking”

Switches the horizontal and vertical blanking off or on or to narrow blanking values.

Selection:

”OFF”H and V blanking switched off

”NORM”H and V blanking switched the standard norm

”NARRO”H and V blanking switched to narrow blanking (has no effects in HDTV standards)

F 1

F 2



4.13.3.2 Setup Video ”analog coding format”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Defines the mode of the analog SDTV or HDTV outputs.

Selection:

”YCRCB”YCRCB operation

”RGB”RGB operation

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2



4.13.3.3 Setup Video ”Sync on RGB”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Switches the sync signal in the RGB signal on or off.

Selection:

”OFF”Sync in RGB signal switched off

”ON”Sync in RGB signal switched on

4.13.3.4 Setup Video ”limiter 102%”

Switches the 102% video limiter on or off.

Selection:

”OFF”video limiter switched off

”ON”video limiter switched on

4.13.3.5 Setup Video ”VITC” (for future use, not supported)

VITC: Vertical Interval Time CodeSwitches the timecode on or off.

Selection:

”OFF”VITC switched off

”ON”VITC switched on

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5



4.13.3.6 Setup Video ”key blanking”

Switches the key blanking on or off.

Selection:

”OFF”Key blanking switched off

”ON”Key blanking switched on

4.13.3.7 Setup Video ”digital coding format”

Switches the 4:2:2, 4:2:2:4, 4:4:4:4, GBR/KBR or the GRKB mode on.

Selection:

”4:2:2”4:2:2 mode switched onLink A: Y, CB, CRLink B: Y, CB, CRLuminance with halfband filtered chrominance according to CCIR 601/656

”4:2:2:4”4:2:2:4 mode switched onLink A: Y, CB, CRLink B: K, 0, 0Link A: Luminance with halfband filtered chrominance according to CCIR 601/656Link B: with Key, Chrominance off

”4:4:4:4”4:4:4:4 mode switched onLink A: Y, CB0, CR0Link B: K, CB1, CR1Link A: Luminance and even unfiltered chrominanceLink B: Key and odd unfiltered chrominance

”G/KBR”GBR/KBR mode switched onLink A: G, B0, R0Link B: K, B1, R1Link A: Green and even unfiltered blue and redLink B: Key and odd unfiltered blue and red

”GRKB”GRKB mode switched onLink A: G0, G1, G2, G3, ... / R0, R1, R2, R3, ...Link B: K0, K1, K2, K3, ... / B0, B1, B2, B3, ...Link A: all green and than all red signalsLink B: all Key and than all blue signals

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4



4.13.3.8 Setup Video ”Sync on YCRCB”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


(in HDTV Output only)Switches the sync signal in the YCRCB signal

Selection:

”NONE”No sync signal in video

”Y”Sync only inserted in Y signal

“STAND”1250 sync only in Y signal1080 sync in all channels: Y CR CB

“ALL”Sync in all channels: Y CR CB

4.13.3.9 Setup Video “Bi - level” sync

Selection: OFF / ON

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 12



4.13.3.10Setup Video ”actual HOA Filter”

Selects the analog output filter for HDTV or future standards.

Default filter equipment on board HDTV Output Analog FY 6314.xx:Filter bank 1: EurekaFilter bank 2: Full Bandwidth

The equipped filters are displayed on the control panel F2 and F3.

Selection:

”AUTO”Selects the filter depending on the TV format at the analog HDTV outputsFormat 1250 , 1125, 1080 Filter: Eureka other Formats Filter optional

“EUREKA”Eureka filter is selected in all analog HDTV modes

”FULLBW”Filter is bypassed in all analog HDTV modes

The selected filter is displayed on the control panel

4.13.3.11 Setup Video ”output Wordlength”

Switches the wordlength in the digital output signal from 8 to 10 bits.

Selection:

”8 BIT”8 bit wordlength switched on

”10 BIT”10 bit wordlength switched on

4.13.3.12Setup Video ”matrix 1080x720p”

R’G’B’ to Y’C’B C’R matrix coefficients for the HDTV standards 1280*720/60P and1920*1080/60I can be switched-over between SMPTE 240M and SMPTE 274 /296MSelection:

”274M”coefficients according to SMPTE 274 and 296M

“240M”coefficients according to SEMPTE 240M

EXITCloses setup submenu ”Video Settings”.

Close window



4.13.4 SETUP GENLOCK

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 525: Setup submenu ”Genlock Settings”

Setup submenu ”Genlock Settings” is opened by pressing key F7 ”setup GENLK”in main menu ”SETUP”.

This window serves to perform genlock basic adjustments.

The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor controlkeys. Depending on the selection, the softkey assignment in the opened windowis changed.Depending on the assignment, the function keys F1 to F9 are used to change andto store the switching status.

Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) closes the window and returns the user to mainmenu SETUP.

Overview


F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 1

F 2 F 8to

F 9



4.13.4.1 Genlock setting ”Genlock ref-sync-select”

Switches over to different genlock reference sync signals.

Selection:

”INT”telecine is synchronized internally (runs free)

”EXT1”telecine is synchronized by sync signal SYNC 1 on terminal panel rack 3

”EXT2”telecine is synchronized by sync signal SYNC 2

”EXT3”telecine is synchronized by sync signal SYNC 3 on terminal panel rack 3

”SERIA(L)”telecine is synchronized by sync signal SER REF on terminal panel rack 3

4.13.4.2 Genlock setting ”Genlock pixel_delay”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Changes the genlock delay to pixel increments.Selection:”0”Delay: none

”1–7”Delay: 1 to 7 pixels

”more”Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel(max. delay: 1 line).Note: Switch off the ”more” operation when changing to other parameters.

F 1

F 2 F 8to

F 9

F 1

F 2 F 8to

F 9



4.13.4.3 Genlock setting ”Genlock subpixel_delay”

Changes the pixel delay to less than 1 pixel.

Selection:

”0”Delay: none

”1–7”Delay: 1 to 7 pixel parts

”more”Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel(max. delay: 1 pixel, in 256 single steps)

Note: Switch off the ”more” operation when changing to other parameters.

4.13.4.4 Genlock setting ”Genlock line_delay”

Changes the genlock delay to line increments.

Selection:

”0”Delay: none

”1–7”Delay: 1 to 7 lines

”more”Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel(max. delay: 1 frame)

Note: Switch off the ”more” operation when changing to other parameters.

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2 F 8to

F 9



4.13.4.5 Genlock setting ”enable rack2-rack3 delay”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Switches on or off rack2-rack3 delaySelection:

”OFF”Delay off

”ON”Delay on; value depending from parameter “rack2-rack3 delay”

Note!

Parameter rack2-rack3 delay are used to match the genlock generator delayto the delay of a color corrector, operating between rack 2 and rack3 (e.g.Pogle MegaDef)

4.13.4.6 Genlock setting ”rack2-rack3 delay”

Changes the genlock delay from 0 to 7 ore more line increments.

Selection:

”0”Delay: none

”1–7”Delay: 1 to 7 lines

”more”Delay: adjustable via the adjust dial or the numeric keypad of the control panel (max. 15 lines or 14 lines with option 6SC)

F 12



EXITCloses setup submenu ”Genlock Settings”.

Close window

F 1

F 2



4.13.5 SETUP PANEL

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 528: Setup submenu ”Control Panel Settings”

Submenu ”Control Panel Settings” is selected by pressing function key F9 ”setupPANEL” in main menu SETUP.

This submenu serves to set the configuration for the control panel.

The individual parameters are selected with the adjust dial or the cursor keys. Thefunction keys F1 to F9 serve to change the values or the switching conditions, de-pending on assignment.

If figures have to be entered, the standard values are shown in the softkey barabove the function keys. This facilitates a rapid setting. Of course, it is also possibleto enter values within the limits using the numeric keyboard or the adjust dial.

Pressing function key F12 (EXIT) closes the submenu and returns the user to mainmenu SETUP.

Overview

The meanings of the individual parameters and the possible selections and rangesare described in the section below.

4.13.5.1 Control panel setting ”film supply”

Display of the film supply in the HOME menu in feet or minutes (see section 4.3

”HOME menu on page 4-9, 5 ).

”FEET”Film supply is indicated in feet.

”TIME”Film supply is indicated in minutes.

F 1 F 8to

F 1

F 2



4.13.5.2 Control panel setting ”screen saver”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 529: Setup submenu “Control Panel Settings”

“OFF”, 1 to 7 MINSwitches off the MCP display after an adjustable time. After actuating any controlelement, the menu shown last appears on the display.

4.13.5.3 Control panel setting ”beep on user message”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


Signal tone when user messages are given

”NO” No beep

”YES”User messages are accompanied by a short beep.

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2



4.13.5.4 Control panel setting ”beep on diagn message”

Signal tone when diagnostic messages are given

”NO”No beep

”YES”Diagnostic messages are accompanied by a short beep

Note:

The long alarm which is given in case of serious diagnostic messages can-not be switched off.

4.13.5.5 Control panel setting ”keyclick”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


”OFF”No acknowledgement of a key actuation

”ON”Each key actuation is acknowledged with a click.

4.13.5.6 Control panel setting ”multi function dial memory”

”OFF”No storage

“ON”In the Vario Motion and Shuttle modes, the last MFD position (film speed and filmrun direction) is stored when the mode is left. When the Vario Motion and Shuttlemodes are selected again, this last setting is used.

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2



4.13.5.7 Control panel setting ”press mf dial enabled”

“OFF”No change-over

“ON”Depending on selection of ”pressing mf dial switches jog <–>(details in the next paragraph) pressing the MFD changes over between Joggingand Vario Motion or Jogging and Shuttle.

4.13.5.8 Control panel setting ”pressing mf dial switches jog <–>”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


(only effective if ”press mf dial enabled” is ”on” )

“VAR”Pressing the MFD changes over between the Jogging and Vario Motion modes.

“SHTL”Pressing the MFD changes over between the Jogging and Shuttle modes.

4.13.5.9 Control panel setting ”mf dial clutch”

“OFF”No latching, no locking

“ON”MFD latches slightly in Shuttle and Vario Motion modes at film speed = zero (centralposition) and is locked when the maximum speed in the same direction is selected(forward and reverse).

F 1 F 9to

F 2 F 8to



4.13.5.10Control panel setting ”mf dial rubbing”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


1 to 7 and moreAdjustment of a rotation resistance for slight retardation of the MFD in Shuttle andVario Motion modes.The higher the selected value, the higher the retardation effect.

4.13.5.11 Control panel setting ”volatile softkeys provided after (x0.1s)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


1 to 7Only valid in this submenu (setup PANEL).When a parameter field in the submenu is selected with the adjust dial or the cursorkeys, a certain time should pass before a softkey bar appears above the functionkeys.

”5” With this, it can for instance be determined that any selection being present formore than 0.5 seconds is definitive. Only then, the softkey bar should appearon the display as it might be irritating otherwise.

F 1

F 2



4.13.5.12Control panel setting ”extended softkey modes (toggle, switch)”

Relevant for tables and quasi-analog level adjustments.

”NO”Two-hand controlSelection of a parameter from among several parameters arranged one above theother is made by means of scroll bar or pressing the cursor keys (cursor up, cursordown). The selected parameter line is displayed inverse.After the function key is released, the corresponding field may not be changed (thishelps to prevent accidental changes).

”YES”Several selections enabled at the same time:

a) Switch mode (single-hand control)Longer pressing (duration of key activation longer than entered for ”key togglesif pressed shorter than (x0.1s)” and subsequent release of a function key en-ables the selection. The softkey is shown inverse.The adjust dial or the cursor keys serve to move the scroll bar (inverse) to thedesired parameter. The value is entered automatically.If the function key is pressed and released again, it is disabled (goes out).Now, turning the adjust dial or pressing a cursor key is without any effect.

If after the last setting with the adjust dial or the cursor keys no setting is madefor a period longer than entered for ”key auto hold time in switch mode (sec)”,the key will be disabled (goes out) automatically in order to avoid any accidentalchanges of values.

b) Toggle mode (not applicable for setting of continuous values such as level ad-justments)Short touch (duration for key activation shorter than entered for ”Key togglesif pressed shorter than (x0.1s) of the function key below will move the scroll bardown with each touch.

c) Two-hand controlAs described under ”NO”

F 1 F 8to

F 1 F 6to



4.13.5.13Control panel setting ”Key toggles if pressed shorter than (x 0.1s)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


0 to 7

(only effective if ”extended key modes (toggle/switch)” has been enabled withYES”). This serves to enable selection of a parameter from a table (scroll bar).A short touch (duration of the touch shorter than entered here) of the function keybelow a table moves the scroll bar down with each touch.Pressing the key longer enables the selection with the adjust dial or the cursor keys(see description ”extended key modes (toggle/switch)”.Repeated pressing means disabling.

4.13.5.14Control panel setting ”Key auto hold time in switch mode (sec)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


10 – 60 s

(only effective if ”extended key modes (toggle/switch)” has been enabled withYES”).

F 1 F 7to



Serves to determine the automatic disabling time after the last entry.If after the enabling of a setting no entry is made with the adjust dial or the cursorkeys before this time has expired, the function is disabled automatically in order toavoid any accidental changes of the settings.

4.13.5.15Control panel setting ”Key holding if pressed longer than”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


1 to 7 s

Avoids accidental change of a parameter selection or setting after releasing thefunction key.

a) Pressing and holding the function key for a longer time (longer than enteredhere) results in enabling selection with the adjust dial or the cursor keys.Subsequent releasing of the function key disables the selection.

b) Pressing and holding the function key and simultaneously turning the adjustdial or pressing a cursor key enables the selection. The scroll bar in the table or the level to be set will be changed directly.Subsequent releasing of the function key disables the selection.

F 1

F 2

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7



4.13.5.16Control panel setting ”rotation adjust mode (linear / accelerated)”

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12


”LIN”Turning the adjust dial changes the adjusted values in linear 1:1 mode.

“ACC”The adjusted values change the faster the quicker the adjust dial is turned.

4.13.5.17Control panel setting ”iMCS message weighting for panel”

This parameter decides the weighting of the FCP messages which are sent viaiMCS to the Shadow Tele Cine maintenance program SDCMAINT.

Steps of messages weighting sent via iMCS

“0” all messages

“1” information

“2” warnings

“3” light recoverable errors

“4” standard errors

“5” severe errors

“6” fatal errors

F 1

F 2

F 7



4.13.6 SET TIME

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

1

Fig. 539: Setup menu with window ”Set Date and Time”

Window ”Set Date and Time” is opened by pressing key F10 ”set TIME” in mainmenu SETUP.

The display shows the window above with the possibility to set date and time.

Overview

1 Field for presetting date and time


realtime CLEARClears entry.

realtime SETSets the data for time and date preselected in field 1.

Set the cursor in field 1 to the desired position of date and time.

Enter the new values via the ten-key keypad.

Actuate SET key F6 to store the value set in field 1.

EXITCloses window ”Set Date and Time”.

Alternatively, press function key F12 ”window CLOSE”.

Set dateand time

Function keys

Close window

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4



4.13.7 SET REMIF – SETUP REMOTE INTERFACE

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 540: Setup menu with window ”Setup Remote”

Submenu ”Setup Remote” is selected by pressing key F11 ”set REMIF” in mainmenu SETUP.

This window serves to select the interfaces (for filmdeck, video, audio, sizing andmonitoring) from which the Shadow is remote-controlled (connections, see manualPlanning and Installation).

Overview

Not assigned

Select remote I/F FILMD.For controlling the filmdeck, optionally via the own (local) control panel or an exter-nal control panel.Rem 1 to 2 are iMCS (RJ45) control connections.Rem 1 is provided for the Functional Control Panel and Rem 2 and 3 for externalcolor corrections.Rem 4, 5 (J61, J60 connection unit Rack 2) are RS422 interfaces for connectingan editor or a filmdeck control panel.Rem 6 Para. (J65, connection unit Rack 2) is a parallel interface for connecting acontrol panel with reduced filmdeck functions.

Select remote I/F VIDEOThe function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the video am-plifier, alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

Select remote I/F AUDIOThe function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the audio am-plifier, alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

Function keys

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 12

F 11

F 2

F 7



Select remote I/F SIZINGThe function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the sizing,alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

Select remote I/F MONITThe function is similar as for function key F2, but applies to control of the monitor-ing, alternatively local or external via Rem 1 to Rem 3.

EXITCloses the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP

Window CLOSECloses the window and returns the user to main menu SETUP

Example:

connect filmdeck remote control to Rem 4

Filmdeck remote control wished on Rem 4.

Selects menu SETUP

[set REMIF] Selects submenu setup REMIF

[select remote I/F FILMD.]Selects remote interface FILMDECK and then adjust Rem 4.

[EXIT]Returns the user to main menu SETUP

ApplicationSetup

4.14 Diagnosis Menu FCPSTE-B1


4.14 DIAGNOSIS MENU

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

DIAGN error from ....

Panel info ....... 03 - Aug - 1998 14:51:50 SPC running again

FCP–SW: .....FCP–FW: .....

1 2 3 4 7 5 6

Fig. 541 Diagnosis menu

Main menu ”Diagn” is selected by pressing menu selection key ”Diagn” on the con-trol panel.

This menu serves to indicate error and system messages for diagnostics and main-tenance of the Shadow Telecine.

If this menu is selected, the hardkey control (control and display elements belowthe display and on the right side of the display) of the control panel are locked, ex-cept:

– the ”Stop” key in the filmdeck control keypad (flashes)– the menu selection keys– and the function keys

Pressing key F12 ”menu BACK” returns the user to the menu from which the diag-nosis menu was selected.

Overview

1 Display of the Shadow Telecine serial number

2 Display ”satellite FCP”Information that the control panel (FCP: Functional Control Panel) is re-motely controlled via the remote control interface iMCS (”satellite”).

3 Status machine control units1st Line: Units are started and available2nd Line: Units are released and running

FDC: Film Deck ControllerASC: Analog Signal ControlSPC: Spatial Processing Control

Function keys

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5

F 6

F 7

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 11

F 12

STE-B14.14 Diagnosis Menu FCP


4 Additional box for machine error messages

5 Display of the actual date and time

6 FCP-SW: software characteristic of the Functional Control PanelFCP-FW: firmware characteristic of the Functional Control Panel(firmware: electronic circuits in software)

7 Diagnosis-messages

restart PANELSoftware restart of the control panel

restart TKPress F2 twice: software restart of the Shadow Telecine.

not assigned

test KEYB opens separate submenu, see section 4.14.1 Keyboard Test(performance test of the keys, key decoders, key lamps, LEDs as well as MFD anddigipot)

test DISPopens separate submenu, see section 4.14.2 Display Test (performance test of the display electronics)

show STATU(S)opens window, see section 4.14.3 Status Display(status messages concerning SCB, film illumination, genlock, FPN, and Wetgatestatus)

Not assigned

configuration OPTIOopens window option control dialog, see section 4.14.4

configuration SW (software)opens window software configuration, see section 4.14.5

configuration BOARDopens window board configuration, see section 4.14.6

clear MESSA

menu BACKPressing this key returns the user to the menu from which the diagnostic menu wasselected.

F 1 F 11to

F 12



4.14.1 KEYBOARD TEST

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 542 Submenu ”Diagn. Keyb”

Submenu ”Diagn.Keyb” is selected by pressing function key F4 ”test KEYB” in mainmenu ”Diagn”.

This menu enables checking the keys, key decoders, key lamps, LEDs as well asthe MFD and the digipot.

A correct functioning of the control elements is ensured when the display showsthe corresponding symbol after having actuated the control elements.

The display ”key bounce indicator” has to light up only once when actuating abounce-free key.A flickering of the display indicates a bouncing of the keys and consequently a dis-turbance.

Not assigned

EXITpress twice to close the window

Test

Function keys

F 1

F 2

F 3

F 4

F 5 F 9to

F 10

F 11

F 12



4.14.2 DISPLAY TEST

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 543 Submenu ”Display Test”

Submenu ”Display Test” is selected by pressing function key F5 ”test DISP” in themenu ”Diagn”.

This menu enables checking the correct functioning of the EL display.

A correct functioning of the EL display is ensured when the display shows the corre-sponding functions (gray values, test patterns, circles or frames) after havingpressed a function key.

show SELopens the function key row F2 to F11 for selection of the test patterns.

pattern BLACK generates black area

WHITE generates white area

GREY generates grey area or checkerboard

generate diverse line patterns

CIRCL generates circles

FRAME generates outer frame

EXIT Closes the window

Test

Function keys



4.14.3 STATUS DISPLAY

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 544 Diagnosis menu with window ”Diagnostic Status”

Window ”Diagnostic Status” is opened by pressing key F6 ”show STATU” in mainmenu ”Diagn”.

On the right side of the window, the operating time of the Shadow Telecine and alloperating times (and life times) of the Shadow lamps are displayed.On the left side of the window, the current status of SCB, film illumination, genlocksynchronizing, FPN and Wetgate is shown.

Possible status messages are:

SCB status:

not running SCB not in operation

running SCB in operation

starting SCB starts up

startup error SCB initialization errorduring startup recognized

Illumination status:

level reached nominal illumination level reached

level not reached nominal illumination level not reached

level change illumination level changed

Genlock status:

sync check running sync check after changing the video standardor the sync source

external sync ok external synchronization accepted

no locking to external sync wrong external sync, no locking

no external sync connected no external sync found

internal sync ok internal sync generator works

internal sync error internal sync generator defective(FY 1316, rack 3)

F 1 F 7to

F 8

F 9

F 10

F 11

F 12



FPN status:

on correct FPN data loaded

off no FPN data loaded

Wetgate status:

Wetgate not supported jet

Not assigned

reset operation time PROJResets the operation time of the projection lamp.

reset operation time CAPResets the operation time of the capstan lamp.

reset operation time A16Resets the operation time of the audio comopt 16mm lamp.

reset operation time A35Resets the operation time of the audio comopt 35mm lamp.


Function keys

F 5



4.14.4 OPTION CONTROL DIALOG

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Rotation

Wetgate

8mm Scanning

HDNR

Megadef

Fig. 545 Diagnosis menu with “Option Control Dialog”

Window ”Option Control Dialog” is opened by pressing key F8 ”configuration OP-TIO” in main menu ”Diagn”.

This window displays the activated and available options of the telecine. Sendingthe appropriate option code from the “Thomson License Document” activates thedesired features.

To installing an Shadow option please enter the option code and press F5 send.All options indicated with “ON“ are installed.

1. Take the License Document(s) (see 546) you got from Thomson Digital Video Systems and enter the license code stringfrom the License Document into the edit field at the lower left sideof the dialog. Use the numeric data entry keypad on the Func-tional Control Panel for input the license code. Press the buttonSHIFT and the numbers 4...9 to enter the characters A ..F. Thelicense code string consists of 5 times 4 characters or numbers.

2. Then push the ”Send”-button. If the decoding of the license stringwas successful the menu shows the name of the new option. Ifa this option has a time limit, this limit will be shown in the column‘Timeout’

An error message ” Invalid license code !” appears, if the ShadowTelecine cannot decode the license code string. Perhaps you madea typing error during entry or the license document belongs to anotherShadow Telecine.



Please verify, if the product type and the serial no. shown in the main menu Diagno-sis (541) corresponds to the entries in the License Document(s).

Fig. 546 Example License Document

Now you can enter another license code or leave the dialog with the ”EXIT”– F12button.

F 1 F 11to

F 12



4.14.5 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION OF THE CONTROLLERS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

Fig. 547 Diagnosis menu with window ”Software Configuration”

Window ”Software Configuration” is opened by pressing key F9 ”configuration SW”in main menu ”Diagn”.

This window displays the current software versions of the following Shadow Tele-cine controllers:

ASC Analog Signal Controller (in rack 1)

FDC Film Deck Controller (in rack 2)

SPC Spatial Processing Control (in rack 3)

FCP Functional Control Panel (in control panel)

Not assigned

EXITCloses the window, returns to the diagnosis menu.

Function keys

F 1 F 11to

F 12



4.14.6 HARD- AND SOFTWARE EQUIPMENT OF THE P.C. BOARDS

F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 F 6 F 7 F 8 F 9 F 10 F 11 F 12

FY 4313/12

FY 4345/13

Fig. 548 Diagnosis menu with window ”HW/SW equipment”

Window ”Shadow HW/SW equipment” is opened by pressing key F10 ”configura-tion BOARD” in main menu ”Diagn”.

This window displays the current hard- and software equipments of the p.c. boardsmounted in racks 1–3.

Not assigned

EXITCloses the window, returns to the diagnosis menu.

Function keys

5. OperationSTE-B1


5. OPERATION

Front doors opened: Film operation up to a fixed speed of maximum 50 frames per second is possible.

Front doors closed: All operation modes are possible.

Attention:Opening the front doors effects that a high shuttle speed is reduced to2 times play speed!

Front doors locked:With a certain shuttle speed (>2 times play) closed front doors are locked ad-ditionally. The front doors are unlocked as soon as the shuttle speed isreached again.

Note:Should it happen, that due to a technical disturbance, the electronic doorlock cannot be unlocked, it is possible to manually unlock the door lock, seesection 3 Servicing, chapter 3.17 in the Service Manual.

5.1 REPRODUCTION (PLAY)

There are four reproduction modes – Play, Jogging, Vario Motion and Shuttle.The following sections will give an overview of their features and applications.

5.1.1 PLAY

Play mode for reproduction at normal speed.

Reproduction in this mode is started by pressing key ”Play �” on the control panel.

5.1.2 JOGGING

Select Jogging mode if you want to view a scene in slow motion frame by frame.

Reproduction in this mode is started by pressing key ”Jog” on the control panel.

In this mode the trackball can be used as Jog speed control.

5. Operation STE-B1


5.1.3 VARIO MOTION

Select Vario Motion mode if you want to play back a scene in slow motion.

The film speed can be set with the trackball in the range of the SAS speed in forwardand reverse direction.

Vario Motion mode is started by pressing key ”Var” on the control panel.

5.1.4 SHUTTLE

Select Shuttle mode if you want to reach a distant film position within shortest time(also rewind).

The film speed is set with the trackball in the range of +/–10 times the normal speed(with 35mm).

Reproduction in this mode is started by pressing key ”Shtl”.

Note: The maximum film speed is reduced near the end of the film.In Shuttle mode, the video picture can serve for orientation purposes.

5. OperationSTE-B1


5.2 AUTOMATIC SWITCHING-OFF

The telecine includes three automatic switching-off functions.

1. Film end switching-off

2. Film break switching-off

3. Thermal switching-off

5.2.1 FILM END SWITCHING-OFF

In the Play or Play mode, the film is spooled out completely and the film driveis stopped automatically when the end of film is reached.

In the Shtl or Shtl mode, the film speed is reduced from maximum to normalspeed and then stopped when the end of film is reached.Pressing the Shtl key once more spools the film out completely and the film driveis stopped automatically.

The end-of-film function is enabled again by pressing the Stop key on the film deckpanel.

5.2.2 FILM BREAK SWITCHING-OFF

In the Play , Play and Shtl or Shtl modes, the film drive is stopped imme-diately in case of a film break.

After a short time, the light of the Stand by key on the Local Control Panel goesout and the Stop key lamp on the control panel flashes.

The FPN correction is preserved, the last picture is not frozen.

5. Operation STE-B1


5.2.3 THERMAL SWITCHING OFF

To avoid overheating problems caused by to high a temperature of outgoing coolingair, a thermal switch is installed into the Shadow Telecine.

The mains voltage will be switched off by means of this sensor when the exhaustair exceeds a temperature of 55°C ± 4°C (131oF ± 39oF).

Thomson guarantees Shadow operation at an ambient temperature of maximum35°C (95oF). The temperature of the exhaust air is normally by 10°C (50oF) higherthan the intake air. If the ambient temperature rises up to 40°C (104oF) and higher,damage to a running Shadow Telecine is possible.

In such a case the machine is disconnected from the mains and further operationis only possible after the ambient temperature was reduced.

The thermal switch is performed with a hold function and the mains voltage can onlybe switched on via a reset button of this switch (see figure below).

In case the Shadow Telecine cannot be re-powered:

� Set the power switch in position ”off”

� Open the rear doors

� Check the power connection:– Mains voltages at the Mains Terminal Board FH 1031– 3 (2) phase circuit breaker

� Push the reset button of the internal thermal switch.

� Close the rear doors

� Switch on the machine

Thermal switch incl. housing Push here for reset the thermal switch

Fig. 501: Thermal switch in Shadow cabinet

5. OperationSTE-B1


5.3 MANUAL EMERGENCY SWITCHING-OFF

In an emergency case, the telecine can be switched off immediately with thePower switch (on the right side of the Shadow cabinet) from all operationmodes without any risk for the telecine or the film.

5. Operation STE-B1


6. MaintenanceSTE-B1


6. MAINTENANCE

Modern telecine units stand out for high life expectancy and low maintenance ex-penditure. Nevertheless, preventive maintenance will be the basis to ensure reli-ability in service and to preserve the value of the telecine.This document provides the instructions needed for fast and competent carrying-out of maintenance works.

6.1 BASIC ACCESSORIES

With the Shadow Telecine the basic accessories are provided, including specialtools and parts for first commissioning and servicing of the telecine.

Following parts are included:

Pc. Designation Part No.: Remarks / Use

1 Adjusting Pin Philips 1 126 696 013 Audio Adjustment

1 Allen Key 1.5 mm 9 000 505 140 Filmdeck Assembling

1 Allen Key 2 mm 9 000 505 141 Filmdeck Assembling

1 Allen Key 2.5 mm 9 000 505 142 Filmdeck Assembling




1 Screw Driver 3mm (hexagon)

9 000 505 045 Filmdeck Assembling

1 Wrench 5,5 9 000 505 103 Roller Adjustment

1 Wrench Size 7 9 000 505 105 Cabinet Assembling



1 Wrench 13 9 000 505 114 Cabinet Assembling

1 Wrench 17x19 9 000 505 134 Leveling Feet Adjustment

1 Screw Driver Size 0 9 000 505 045 Audio & Deflection rollers adjust.



1 Screw Driver (fine) 9 000 505 036 Board adjustment

1 Screw Driver (1 x 5.5) 9 000 505 036 Board adjustment

1 Glove Cloths 5 001 910 280 Cleaning Optics, Capstan Roller

1 Brush flat form 5 001 916 051 Cleaning Fan Unit

Dustaway 5 108 601 021 Pressed-air Cleaner

1 Polisher 5 001 910 366 Tool for cleaning the guides of integration cylinder

1 Scraper 1 118 500 059 Tool for cleaning the guides of integration cylinder

10 Capstan tacho lamp 3 116 300 021 Spare part

6. Maintenance STE-B1


6.2 MAINTENANCE AND AIDS MATERIALS

Materials and aids for maintenance can be bought from

Thomson Local National Sales OrganizationsorBTS Media Solutions GmbH D-64331 Weiterstadt Germany

under the following order numbers:

� Cleaning fluid for the capstan roller (isopropyl alcohol) 5 108 701 008

� Audio head demagnetization 220 V (degaussing coil) 3 121 216 011

� Audio head demagnetization 110 V (degaussing coil) 3 121 216 010

� Dustaway (compressed-air cleaning means) 5 108 601 021

� Cleaning cloths 5 001 310 280

� Filter Set 2 128 102 142



6.3 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

Thomson recommends the following cleaning and maintenance intervals:

Cleaning andmaintenance intervals

prior toeach

film thread-ing

every4–8 weeks

semi–annually

every3–5 years

seesection

Light gap and film-guid-ing edges (optical block)

X 6.5.26.6.3

Capstan roller X 6.5.3

Film drive mechanism X 6.5

PT rollers X 6.5.1

Film gate X 6.5.2

COMMAG audio head X 6.5.4

Reel holder X 6.5.5

Filters and lenses X 6.6.4

Infrared filter X 6.6.4

Heat absorbing filter X 6.6.4

Filters of the filter wheel X 6.6.5

Front area of light split-ter (telecine) X 6.6.2

COMOPT sound optics X 6.7, 6.8

Gate blast filter change X 6.10

Check gate blast compressor X 6.10

Filter mats, blowers X 6.96.11

Backup battery X 6.12



6.4 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Attention!Before performing maintenance and service works, switch off the ShadowTelecine and disconnect it from the mains by switching off the circuit breakerat the Power Terminal Unit!

Prior to starting cleaning works on the drive mechanism, optical block, capstanroller or audio scanner, make sure that no film is threaded.

For cleaning, always wear gloves and use clean, lint-free cleaning cloths (order no.5 001 310 280) and isopropyl alcohol (order no. 5 108 701 008).

If working is required close to the halogen projector lamp, do not start workingbefore it has cooled down for 30 minutes - risk of getting burnt.

For cleaning the capstan roller use isopropyl alcohol only, never acetone!

Please read and follow also the Safety Instructions at the beginning of thecustomer’s manual.



6.5 CLEANING THE FILM DRIVE MECHANISM

All film-contacting parts – such as sprocket wheel, optical block, audio scanner,capstan roller, all deflection and PT rollers (see the figure below) – should regularlybe cleaned from dirt and emulsion deposits.

It is advisable to perform these cleaning works at the intervals indicated on the tableof section 6.3

WINDB

WINDB AA

Capstan rollerOptical block Audio scannerSprocket wheelPT rollers

PT rollers

Fig. 601: Film threading path without PT Rollers

� Switch off the Shadow Telecine. Remove the film from the film deck.

� Remove the emulsion deposits from sprocket wheel and deflection rollers us-ing isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning cloth.



6.5.1 CLEAN OR REPLACE THE PT ROLLERS

PT rollers (particle transfer rollers) are used in the filmdeck to clean the film duringplay on both sides of dirt, dust and lint.

1. For replacing or cleaning remove the PT rollers by withdrawing the snapcap ofthe holder.

3 149 900 882

Holder Set (2 pcs) 2 128 102 117

Snap cap

PTR Roller Set 4 pcs

Fig. 602:

2. Clean the PT rollers in cold water with a rate of 2 - 4 drops mild detergent perliter.

Caution!

� Do not use dishwasher detergent!

� Do not use hot water as it can cause PTR’s to become very sticky andcause excessive adhesion and potential damage to the film.

� Do not use packaging or other tapes to clean a PTR after it has beenwashed! Packaging tape will transfer some of its adhesive to the PTR and causeexcessive adhesion of the film to the PTR, resulting in damage to the film.Simply wash the PTR’s and allow them to dry thoroughly before reinstalla-tion.

� If cleaned properly, PTRs should roll off one another when stuck together.Rollers that stick together without falling off must be rewashed in cold wa-ter with a mild detergent.

3. Dry the rollers and re-mount them.It makes no difference which way the rollers are placed on the hub end for end.

Spare PT Roller Set (4 pcs) order no.: 3 149 900 882

Spare PTR Holder Set (2 pcs) order no.: 2 128 102 117



6.5.2 CLEAN THE FILM GATE

A dirty illumination prisma causes vertical dark stripes in the picture signal. Dirtyfilm guiding can lead to dirt deposits in the integration film block and may causescratches on the film.

� For cleaning the illumination film block and the film guiding the film gate has tobe removed.

� Carefully clean the illumination slit, the film guiding and all film-contacting sur-faces (use a cleaning cloth and isopropyl alcohol).Also clean the ceramic film positioner of the optical block see fig. 604.

� How to use the polisher and the scraper:Clean the film guiding rails of the Integration Film Block if necessary with thepolisher or scraper as shown in the figure below.

Attention:Protect the glass inlay. Use a cover of paper to protect the glass inlaywhen cleaning the film guiding rails with the polisher!

Do not use the red area!

Polisher5 001 910 366

Scraper1 128 500 059

Slit glass inlayFilm guiding rails

Integration Film Block (35 mm)

Fig. 603: Cleaning the film gate

Attention!

Never use the coarse (red) area of the polisher!



Ceramic filmpositioner

Fig. 604: Lens Gate Assembly



6.5.3 CLEAN THE CAPSTAN ROLLER

Attention:

Clean the capstan roller only in stop mode! Risk of hurt!

Capstan roller

Audio scanneroption

Fig. 605: Capstan roller

A dirty capstan roller causes regularly occurring picture steadiness errors in theoutput picture.

� Remove the film from the film deck.

� Clean the complete capstan roller surface thoroughly from all deposits with aisopropyl alcohol moistened cleaning cloth. Avoid to press the roller surface.

As a cleaning agent, use only isopropyl alcohol and a lint-free cleaning cloth!

Attention:

Removing the capstan or changing its position affects the picture steadi-ness, therefore any work on the capstan should be done by Thomson servicepersonnel only.



6.5.4 CLEAN AND DEGAUSS THE COMMAG AUDIO HEAD (OPTION)

Attention:

A polluted or magnetized COMMAG audio head impairs the audio quality.

Cover of the audio scanner(option)

COMMAG audio head

COMOPT scanning elementsinside the capstan roller

Capstan roller

Fig. 606: Audio scanner

� Switch off the Shadow Telecine. Remove the film from the film deck.

� Unscrew and pull off the cover of the audio scanner.

� Clean COMMAG audio headThoroughly clean the surface of the COMMAG audio head from deposits usingisopropyl alcohol and a cleaning cloth.

� Degauss COMMAG audio headSwitch on the degaussing coil and make it touch the COMMAG audio head.Degaussing coil for 220 V order no. 3 121 216 011Degaussing coil for 110 V order no. 3 121 216 010

� Then remove the degaussing coil but do not switch it off unless it is at least 30 cm away from the audio head.

� Clean COMOPT scanning elementsRemove dust from the COMOPT scanning elements of the capstan roller witha compressed air jet (Dustaway spray).

� Fasten the cover of the audio scanner unit.



6.5.5 CLEAN THE REEL HOLDER, WINDING PLATE AND REEL LOCKING KNOB

The rubber surfaces of the Reel Holder, Winding Plate and Reel Locking Knob canbecome hard due to aging or can become grooved due to wear.

The rubber surfaces have a lifetime of about 2 years. After this time the rubber sur-faces must be exchanged for a new Reel Drive Exchange Set FD 0709, see alsochapter 3 “Reel Drive Exchange” in the Service Manual.

Insufficient grip between reel holder and winding plate (for films with bobbins) orfilm reel may cause slippage of the winding plate or the film reel. This can causeservo chatter.

Warning!In the worst case, this may cause film damage.

Note:The rubber parts have to be regularly cleaned, depending on usage, every 4-8weeks. Use only water for cleaning. Alcohol or spiritus will damage the rub-ber coating and accelerate aging.



6.6 CLEANING THE OPITICAL PARTS

The figure on the next page shows the light path in the Shadow Telecine and pro-vides an overview on the required maintenance objects.

Due to mechanical setup and accessibility it is advisable to perform the followingservice works in the order of the section numbers.

Cleaning of the light path is always required when the available light output has de-creased perceptibly.

Attention:

Switch off the Shadow telecine before cleaning the light path, and allow it tocool down for 30 minutes (risk of getting burnt in the proximity of the halogenprojection lamp!).



Film

Gray scale disk

Condenser lens1Infrared filter

Heat absorbing filter

CCD sensor (R)

Filter wheel

Condenser lens 2

Halogen lamp

Beam splitter

(front view)

Filter wheel(back view)

Sizing optics

CCD sensor (G)

CCD sensor (B)

Light slit

Light mains

(inside condenser)

(inside optic block)

Fig. 607: Light path



6.6.1 CLEAN THE OPTICAL BLOCK

� Remove the threaded film from the optical block, if necessary.

� Turn the film gate locking lever of the optical block to the left.

� Remove the optical block.

� Clean the upper lense with an optical cleaning cloth.

Optic blockUpper lens

Fig. 608: Optical block



6.6.2 CLEAN THE FRONT AREA OF THE LIGHT SPLITTER

The front area of the light splitter is directly located over the optical block.

� Remove the threaded film from the optical block, if necessary.

� Remove the optical block

� Clean the front area of the light splitter with a cleaning cloth. Avoid finger prints.

� Insert the optical block.

Front area of thelight splitter (directly over theoptical block)

Fig. 609: Front area of the light splitter



6.6.3 CLEAN THE CODENSER LIGHT SLIT

� After removing the optic block, the light output slit from the condenser unit canbe cleaned with a cleaning cloth. Avoid finger prints.

� Insert the optical block.

Light slit

Fig. 610: Cleaning the condenser



6.6.4 CLEAN FILTERS AND LENSES

� Open the read doors of the cabinet

� Unscrew each filter element.

� Clean the filters with a optical cleaning cloth (order no. 5 001 310 280).

� Insert the filter elements, avoid finger prints.

Filter wheel

4 Filter elementsfixed with screws

Projection lamp

Fig. 611: Lamp house with complete mounted filters

Condensor lens 2

Infrared filter

Condensor lens 1


Slot codingHalogen lamp

–– Fixing screws ––

Fig. 612: Slot coding



� To clean the gray scale disk please remove first heat absorbing filter and con-densor lens 2. Remove the gray scale disk by unscrewing the axle screw

� Insert and fix the disk, avoid finger prints.

Gray scale diskwith axle screw

Condensor lens 2


Fig. 613: Cleaning the gray scale disk



6.6.5 CLEAN THE FILTERS OF THE FILTER WHEEL

� Release the filter wheel by pushing down the motor.

� Revolve the filter wheel that a filter stands upside.

� Move the two fastening brackets of the filter to the side.

� Clean the filter with a optical cleaning cloth and insert the respective filter. Avoidfinger prints.

� The fastening brackets have to lock in by turning.

SPARE

NE

G

PT / IMED

PO

S

CAL

PT / IMED filter

Balance ring

NEG filter

Balance ring

CAL filter

Filter wheel motor

Fastening bracket

Fasteningbracket

Push down for releasingthe wheel!

POS filter

Filter marking

Fig. 614: Insertion of the filter into the filter wheel

STE-B1 6. Maintenance


6.7 CLEAN THE COMOPT SOUND OPTICS (OPTION)

Fastening screwof the audio scanner cover

35mm COMOPT sound optics

16mm COMOPT sound optics

16mm COMMAG sound head

Fig. 615: Audio scanner

� Remove the fastening screw of the audio scanner cover and remove the cover.

� Clean the dirty COMOPT sound optics (light entrance lens as well as light exitlens) with an air jet (Dustaway spray).



6.8 CHANGE THE COMOPT SOUND LAMP

The audio scanner of the Shadow Telecine is equipped with one 6 V/20 W halogenCOMOPT sound lamp each (order no. contained in Lamp and Key Button Set2 128 102 141) for 16mm and 35mm COMOPT films.

The corresponding COMOPT sound lamp will be switched on automatically (de-pending on the optical block in use), when COMOPT is selected.

Plug of theCOMOPT sound lamp

Locking angle

35mm COMOPT sound lamp

16mm COMOPT sound lamp

Centering pin

35mmCOMOPTsoundoptics

16mmCOMOPTsoundoptics

16mm COMOPT audio head

Fig. 616: Audio scanner (opened)

1. Remove the fastening screw of the audio scanner cover and pull off the cover.

2. Pull the plug of the COMOPT sound lamp out of its socket.

3. Turn both locking angles at the lamp holder to the side and pull the defectivelamp out of the lamp holder (note mounting position).

4. Slide the new lamp all the way into the lamp holder (watch the centering pin,avoid finger prints), close both locking angles and refit the lamp plug.

Change COMOPTsound lamp:



When changing a COMOPT sound lamp, slight input level losses are possible inthe respective audio channel.

This slight level loss can be compensated (if necessary) as follows:

Graphical Control Panel

1. Thread a 16mm or 35mm comopt sound signal level film in the telecine.

16mm comopt signal level film, 400 Hz order no.: 0 000 993 49835mm comopt signal level film, 1000 Hz order no.: 0 000 993 503

2. Press menu button ”Audio Levels” on the graphical control panel.The Audio Levels menu is displayed.

3. Press key ”SETUP”.Window ”Studio Level Setup” is opened.

4. Select button “Studio Level” and adjust -3 dBu.

Attention!Note actual adjustment for later readjustment.Press button Close to exit.


5. Press key ”Audio Config” on the control panel.The Audio Config menu is displayed.

6. Touch “Source“ section Window ”SOURCE Channel 1/2” is opened.

Preparation:

Select COMOPTsound operation:




7. Press source channel 1/2 and select “Optical” mode for both channels.

8. Touch “Pre-Adjust” section.Window ”Pre-Adjust” is opened.

9. Start play on the telecine.

Fig. 619: Audio Config menu with window ”Source Pre-Adjust”

Compensateaudio level losses:



10. Press button “Manufacturing only” A numeric keypad menu is displayed.

Enter ”1996” on the numeric keypad of the control panel. The servicemode is active now.

11. Select “Channel 1/2 Level“Compensate the level loss of the COMOPT sound using the adjust dial on thecontrol panel.With 35mm adjust to 0 dBuand with 16mm adjust to +4 dBuat the telecine output AUDIO 1/2 (terminal panel rack 1).

Subsequently press “Close” button to store the adjustments as unity values(default values).

Select section “Pre-Adjust again for the following equalizer adjustment.

12. Thread a 16mm or 35mm comopt sound frequency response film in the tele-cine.

16mm comopt frequency response film order no.: SMPTE P16-MF35mm comopt frequency response film order no.: SMPTE P35-MF

13. Start play on the telecine.

14. After selecting “Channel 1/2 Equalizer” adjust with the digipot control the fre-quency response to optimum at the telecine output AUDIO 1/2.

adjust with 16mm to � 2 dBand adjust with 35mm to � 1 dB

Subsequently press button “Close” to store the adjustments as unity values(default values).

15. Adjust to the original used studio level again. That means readjust the adjustment of item xxxx to the original value.

Activateservice mode:

Adjustthe equalizer:



6.9 CLEAN THE AIR FILTERS

Check the air filters semi-annually for dirt deposits and where appropriate, cleanor change them. Only clean filters ensure good cooling and optimum operation.

Air filters in the telecine cabinet:

� Filters 1, 2 Front side, under rack 2 and rack 3

� Filters 3, 4 and 5 Rear side, bottom

Spare filters are contained in the Battery and Filter Set (order no. 2 128 102 142)

6.9.1 FRONT SIDE FILTERS

� Open the lower front doors of the cabinet (rack 2 and rack 3)

� Pull on the front side of the Shadow telecine at the gripping ledge of the air filterand remove it. The gripping ledge is located below the rack 2 and rack 3.The air filter consists of a filter mat which is fitted into a flat frame.

� Remove the filter mat from the frame. Cautiously blow out the filter mat or washit in warm water (approx. 40 °C), if required add a commercial soft agent.Clean the filter mat never with a sharp water jet or compressed air jet!

Filter mat

Fig. 620: Front side, filter mat rack 3



6.9.2 REAR SIDE FILTERS

� Open the rear door of the telecine cabinet.

� The air filters are located directly before rack 2 and rack 3 in the bottom frameof the telecine.

� Remove the filter mat from the frame, blow out, wash or change it.

Filter mat

Fig. 621: Cleaning the filter mat



6.10 ADJUST COMPRESSED AIR OF THE GATEBLAST UNIT

An integrated gateblast unit, consisting of a pressure reducer, 3 �m air filter andmagnetic valve, keeps the light gap and the integrations cylinder of the film gatedustfree. An external air compressor connected with a high pressure hose is addi-tionally required.

� Check your compressor regulary:– 2.5 ... 7.5 bar (35 ... 107 lb/sq.inch)– Pre-filtered air (max. 40 �m particle size)– Dry air, less than 20% relative air humidity– Required air flow 60 l/min

� Check the Shadow gateblast unit regulary:– Adjust the air pressure to 0.6 bar (8 lb/sq.inch) in Play mode– Change air filter regulary– Empty water collector regulary!

Air filter is included in the Filter & Battery Set 2 128 102 142

Pressure reducer

Air filter 3 �m with water collector

Air pressure:0.6 bar (8 lb/sq. inch)

Fig. 622: Gateblast unit of the Shadow Telecine

The gateblast unit consists of the a magnetic valve, an air filter with water drainingand a pressure reducer.

When the telecine is switched off or when mains failure occurs, the magnetic valveof the gateblast unit switches off the air supply.

� Switch the Shadow telecine to play and open the rear doors.

� Adjust the air pressure at the gateblast unit to 0.6 bar (8 lb/sq.in.).Pull the knob of the pressure reducer, adjust the air pressure and press theknob again for locking.

Gateblast unit



6.11 CLEAN THE BLOWERS

For the Shadow telecine, cleaning of the ventilators is confined to the availablefresh air and exhaust air blowers of the cabinet and monitoring cabinet.

The blowers of the internal devices do not require cleaning since they areconstantly provided with filtered air and therefore have only slight dirt deposits.

Outgoing air: 900 m3/h (1200 cu. yd. / h)

Rack 1

Fan Unit

Rack 2

Fan Unit

Rack 3

Fan Unit

Air Exhaust OptionOutlet 2 x 250 mm

Ventilation Shaft

Rear Fan Unit

Rear Fan Unit

Lamp Fan

Incoming air

Fan Unit

Thermal Switch

integrated in the doors

Fig. 623: Blowers in the Shadow telecine cabinet



Check the blowers for dirt deposits and where appropriate clean them semi-annu-ally. Only clean blowers guarantee good cooling and optimum operation.

6.11.1 EXHAUST AIR BLOWERS

� For cleaning the blowers in the cabinet, loosen the 10 fastening screws of theblower cover on the cabinet top.

� Remove the cover.

� Clean the blower assembly with a suitable vacuum cleaner and a dust brush.

6.11.2 FRESH AIR BLOWERS

� Open the rear door of the cabinet.The blower unit for fresh air is located below rack 2 and rack 3.

� Pull off the power plug, unscrew the earth connector.

� For demounting the blower assembly, loosen the four fastening screws on thefront and pull out the blower assembly.

� Pull off and clean the air filter.

� Clean the blowers with a suitable vacuum cleaner and a dust brush.

Removeblower assembly

Fig. 624: Removing the blower assembly



6.12 CHANGE THE BACKUP BATTERY

6.12.1 CHANGE THE BACKUP BATTERY IN THE TELECINE

According to the manufacturer, the lithium battery used on p.c. board FY 4105 inrack 1 (5th pcb. from left) has a life time of approx. 10 years.In order to ensure no loss of time/date settings in the off-state, Thomson recom-mends as a precaution to exchange the lithium battery after 5 years of operation.

A spare battery can be ordered from the market under the type designation VARTACR1/2 AA.

For exchange, switch off the telecine and pull out the plug-in card. The lithium battery is soldered on the p.c. board. Note the polarity of the battery when installing (danger of explosion)! The mountingposition is marked accordingly on the p.c. board.

When exchanging, the telecine loses the current time/date setting and returns aftera battery change to a standard setting.For new time/date setting see section 4.13.6.

Caution!

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced (changed poles).

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by themanufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers in-structions.

Protect the environment!

Dead batteries do not belong in the garbage. Hand the used batteries overto a local disposal place!

6.12.2 CHANGE THE BACKUP BATTERY IN THE FUNCTIONAL CONTROL PANEL

The backup battery in the Functional Control Panel should be replaced by Thom-son service personnel only.

Exchange

STE-B1 7. Index


7. INDEX

4:3 / 16:9, –Select TV ratio, 3-12

6/8perf mode, 4-152

AAES/EBU audio data format, 4-91

Air compressor, 6-29

Air filter, 6-29

Air filters, clean, 6-27

Air pressure, 6-29

Audio–Audio channels, adjust, 3-45–Audio outputs to Studio inputs, adapt, 3-59–Audio sources, pre equalize, 3-47–Audio sources, select, 3-45–Channel delay, setup, 4-104–Delay, 4-104–Digital audio channels, synchronize, 3-51–Dolby noise reduction, adjust, 3-48–Film audio paths, check, 3-56–Headphone volume, adjust, 3-60–Input source, setup, 4-94–Lip-synchronous film sound, adjust, 3-55–Lowpass filter, select, 3-50–Lowpass, setup, 4-98–Mono/stereo operation, select, 3-53–Mono/stereo output mode, select, 4-102–Noise reduction, setup, 4-96–Preemphase, select, 3-52–Preemphasis, setup, 4-101–Reference, select, 4-100–Sepmag coupling, 3-61–Studio level, adjust, 3-58–Test tone, select, 4-105

Audio config menu, 4-91

Audio data format, 4-91

Audio level menu, 4-81

Audio level setup, 4-85

Automatic switch over, –from remote to LocalControl Panel, 2-7

Automatic switching-off, 5-3–manually, for emergency, 5-5–upon film break, 5-3–upon film end, 5-3

BBackup battery, change, 6-33

Basic accessories, 6-1

Basic adjustments of the telecine, 3-2

Blowers, clean, 6-31

CCapstan roller, clean, 6-9

Cinerama 6 perf, 4-152

Cleaning and maintenance intervals, 6-3

Color sequence–GBR, 4-143–RGB, 4-143

COMMAG audio head, clean and degauss, 6-10

COMOPT sound lamp, change, 6-23

COMOPT sound optics, clean, 6-22

Condenser light slit, –Cleaning, 6-17

Contour correction, 4-45

Control–Basic menu control with FCP, 4-1–Basic menu control with GCP, 4-1–Configurate control panel, 4-171–Display test, 4-186–Keyboard test, 4-185–Menu control, 4-1–Remote interfaces, setup, 4-181–Submenu, select, 4-4–Table selection, 4-4

Control and display elements, 2-1

Control panels, 2-5–Configurate control panel GCP, 3-2–Graphical control panel, 2-8–Local control panel FH 4500, 2-5

Coring correction, 4-45

DDamping roller, –Arresting the swing arm, 3-83

STE-B17. Index


Data applications, 4-139

Data connection mode–Datagram operation, 4-141–Stream operation, 4-141

Data conversion mode– Genesis, 4-124– Standard, 4-124

Data mode, 4-121

Data output, 3-1–Setup, 4-122

Diagnosis menu, 4-183

Display status, 4-187

EEffect Filter, –Optical, 3-8

Effect filter, –Instert, 3-9

EMV requirements, 3-85

FFilm

–Analog signal basic gain, adjust, 3-35–Black level, adjust, 3-39–Contour and coring, adjust, 3-43–Film masking, adjust, 3-30–Film reels, mount, 3-17–Film type, define, 3-28–Fixed film scanning format, select, 3-22,

4-37–Fixed reproduction format, select, 3-24–Gray level (gamma), adjust, 3-42–Horizontal and vertical blanking, adjust, 3-26–Intensity of film illumination, adjust, 3-33–Matching to different color and monochrome

film types, 3-28–Menu, 4-15–Reproduction format, adjust variably, 3-25–Setup, 4-20–Setup film, 3-11–Setup film deck, 3-11–Sizing format, adjust, 3-22–Speed, select, 3-12–Thread film correctly, 3-15, 3-18–User specific configuration of the telecine,

3-5–White level (and black level), adjust, 3-37–White level, adjust, 3-41–Winding direction, define, 3-15–Winding plates, mount, 3-16

Film deck mechanism, clean, 6-5

Filmdeck setup, 4-150

Filmgate, –Change, 3-7

Filters and lenses, –Cleaning, 6-18

Filters of the filter wheel, –Cleaning, 6-20

Fixed film formats, 4-37

Focus, adjust, 3-21

FPN, –Perform FPN correction, 3-13

Frame line, adjust, 3-20

Front area of the light splitter, clean, 6-16

Function keys, 4-3

GGenlock setup, 4-166

Grading, – Setup, 4-48

Grading menu, 4-45

Graphical Control Panel, 1-1, 4-1–Menustructure, 4-2

Graphical control panel, –Control and displayelements, 4-1

HHardware, –Board configuration, 4-192

Hardware conditions, 3-1

HIPPI data channel, 4-119

HIPPI-status-display, 4-119

Home menu, 4-7

IImage file format

–DPX format, 4-142–TIFF format, 4-142

JJogging, 5-1

KKeycode readers, 3-63

–Arresting the swing arm of the dampingroller, 3-83

STE-B1 7. Index


–Cabling, 3-84–Deflection roller adjustment, AATON reader,

3-75–EMV requirements, 3-85–Mounting, 3-66–Mounting AATON reader, 3-68–Mounting ARRI reader, 3-66–Mounting dual keycode readers, 3-78

–ARRI and AATON, 3-79–ARRI and EVERTZ, 3-80

–Mounting EVERTZ reader, 3-69–Mounting set, 3-65–Mounting single keycode reader on base

plate, 3-70–AATON, 3-73–ARRI, 3-72–EVERTZ, 3-74

–Park and read position, 3-81–ARRI and EVERTZ, 3-82

–Parking position, 3-76–Parking position ARRI, 3-76–Parking positions, –AATON or EVERTZ,

3-77–Safety instructions, 3-63

LLicense Code, 4-190

Light gap and film guiding edges of the opticalblock, clean, 6-7

Locking knob, –Cleaning, 6-11

Look–up tables, 4-137

MMaintenance, 6-1

Menu–Audio config menu, 4-6, 4-91–Audio level, 4-81–Audio level menu, 4-6–Diagnosis menu, 4-6, 4-183–Film menu, 4-6, 4-15–Grading menu, 4-6, 4-45–Home menu, 4-6, 4-7–Main menu overview, 4-6–Monitoring menu, 4-6, 4-107–Multicue menu, 4-6, 4-77–Setup menu, 4-6, 4-145–Sizing menu, 4-6, 4-23–Time code menu, 4-6, 4-65–User menu, 4-6, 4-119–Window, close, 4-4

–Window, open, 4-3

Monitoring–Preset WFM, 4-112–Test pattern, select, 4-110

Monitoring menu, 4-107

Monitoring setup, 4-114

Multi cue menu, 4-77

OOperation, 5-1

Operational preparations, 3-1

Optical block–Change, 3-5–clean, 6-15

Optical parts, –Cleaning, 6-13

Options, –Control dialog, 4-189

PPacking mode, 4-123

Play, 5-1

Power–up, 3-1

Pressure reducer, 6-29

PT rollers, –Cleaning, 6-6

RReel holder, –Cleaning, 6-11

Reproduction (play), 5-1

SSafety instructions, 3-63, 6-4

Set date and time, 4-180

Setup film, 3-11

Setup film deck, 3-11

Setup panel, 4-171

Shuttle, 5-2

Sizing menu, 4-23

Software configuration, 4-191

Software state, 1-1

STE-B17. Index


TTestsignal, – Video, 4-110

Thermal switch, 6-31

Time code menu, 4-65

Transfer mode, 4-144

TV, –TV standard, select, 3-3

TV standard, –Setup, 4-147

UUser menu, 4-119

User specific configuration of the telecine, 3-5

VVario motion, 5-2

Video, –Setup, 4-160

Video Level, 3-34

Vistavision 8perf, 4-152

WWinding plate, –Cleaning, 6-11

Window, 4-3

ZZoom mode, 4-28

Telecine STE-B1 · BTS Media Solutions GmbH Brunnenweg 9 D-64331 Weiterstadt, Germany P.O. Box 1165...

Documents

Transcript of Telecine STE-B1 · BTS Media Solutions GmbH Brunnenweg 9 D-64331 Weiterstadt, Germany P.O. Box 1165...